JP5903201B2 - Bullet ball machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a ball game machine has a lottery regarding whether to generate a winning game that is advantageous to the player when a ball enters the starting opening, and a stunning symbol variation display game by image display and a lottery result during the game A variety of performances that reflect the situation is generated, thereby enjoying the game.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display game result is a big hit, as a big hit game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, a round game that opens and closes the big winning opening with a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern is executed a plurality of times, and an image display is performed accordingly. The equipment is being developed during the big hits to enhance the fun of the game.

  In recent years, in particular, after a number of regular rounds in which a large winning opening is opened and closed so that game balls are easy to win, the big winning opening is closed shortly and closed so that it is difficult for the game balls to win. A high-speed round that repeats a predetermined number of operations is executed, and a hit type that varies the number of rounds with substantial appearances is mounted, thereby improving the interest of the game (for example, the following patent document) 1).

JP 2012-166441 A

  However, conventionally, after a predetermined number of round games has reached the specified number of rounds, the jackpot game is terminated on the condition that a predetermined jackpot end interval period has elapsed, and an ending effect is generated in accordance with the jackpot end interval period. . During the period of repeated short-opening round games, there was no clear notification of whether or not the jackpot game would end despite the fact that the round game with lots of balls had actually ended. .

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a ball game machine that makes it easy to grasp the state of a game during a big hit.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) Based on the command sent from the main control unit (20), which executes a jackpot lottery triggered by the game ball entering the starting port and transmits a command based on the lottery result A ball game machine comprising an effect control unit (24) for controlling the effect,
The main control unit
On the condition that the jackpot lottery is won, the operation of opening and closing the winning prize opening (50) in a predetermined pattern is set as one round game, and the round game is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of rounds to win the jackpot game. Jackpot game control means (S501 to S509) for generating
A round start command for notifying that the big prize opening has been opened by the jackpot game control means, a round end command for notifying that the big prize opening has been closed, and a big hit for notifying that all round games have ended. Transmission means (S522, S554, S580) for transmitting an end command,
The jackpot game is a short-opening round game in which the jackpot game is performed as the round game after the long-opening round game is executed a plurality of times, and then the big winning opening is short-opened so that the game ball is difficult to win. It is a big hit (A for every other than 7 symbols, B for every other than 7 symbols, C for scenarios BB1 to BB5, C for every 7 symbols, D for every other than 7 symbols) that is repeatedly executed up to the specified number of rounds,
The transmission means transmits the round start command when the round game is started in the jackpot game in both cases of the first jackpot and the second jackpot, and when the round game ends. The round end command is transmitted to the jackpot and the jackpot end command is transmitted when the predetermined number of round games are completed (S522, S554, S580),
The production control unit
In the jackpot game, during the period in which the long open round game is executed a plurality of times, a predetermined effect of the big hit effect with the round start command or the round end command as an effect start trigger is executed, and the short open round When the first short-opening round game of the repetitive game is started, effect control means for ending the predetermined effect and starting an ending effect instead (S732 to S734 in FIG. 32, S742 to S744 in FIG. 33) Have
Even if the second effect control means receives the round start command, the round end command, or the jackpot end command during the execution of the ending effect, the second effect control means does not execute the effect using these as a start trigger (S730 in FIG. 32). → Return, S740 in FIG. 33 → Return, S750 in FIG. 34 → Return)
A ball game machine characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, there is provided a ball game machine that makes it easy to grasp the state of a game during a big hit.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening / closing operation | movement setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the solenoid setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation of the special electric accessory in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement continuation determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process according to the small hit special electric appliance operation status in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis process in the production control side main process in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command receiving process in the received command analyzing process in FIG. 30. FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a round start command receiving process in the received command analyzing process in FIG. 30. FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a round end command reception process in the reception command analysis process in FIG. 30. FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command reception process in the received command analysis process in FIG. 30. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario update process in the production control side main process in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern designation command reception process in the received command analysis process in FIG. 30. FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a decoration symbol designation command receiving process in the received command analyzing process in FIG. 30. FIG. It is the figure which illustrated the jackpot type and its winning probability in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which showed the contents of the big hit classification by the side of the special figure 1 in one Embodiment of this invention, its hit game, and an effect scenario. It is the figure which showed the contents of the big hit classification by the side of the special figure 2 in one Embodiment of this invention, its hit game, and an effect scenario. It is the figure which showed the contents of the win game and the production scenario at the time of winning the 7 symbols direct win in the special drawing 1 side win lottery in one execution form of this invention. Similarly, it is the figure which shows the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when winning per A other than 7 symbols in the winning drawing of the special figure 1 side. Similarly, it is the figure which shows the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when the winning lottery other than 7 symbols is won in the special drawing 1 side winning lottery. It is the figure which similarly showed the contents of the winning game and effect scenario at the time of winning a scenario BB1 by the winning lottery of the special figure 1 side. It is the figure which similarly showed the contents of the win game and effect scenario at the time of winning a scenario BB2 by the win lottery of the special figure 1 side. Similarly, it is the figure which shows the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when winning the scenario BB3 by the winning lottery on the special figure 1 side. Similarly, it is the figure which shows the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when winning the scenario BB4 in the winning lottery of the special figure 1 side. Similarly, it is the figure which shows the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when winning the scenario BB5 in the winning lottery of the special figure 1 side. It is the figure which similarly showed the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when 7 wins per C in the special drawing 2 side winning lottery. Similarly, it is the figure which shows the contents of the winning game and the production scenario when the winning lottery other than 7 symbols is won in the special drawing 2 side winning lottery. It is the figure which showed the hit command determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the big hit start setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening operating time setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening / closing operation | movement setting table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening / closing operation | movement setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special electric accessory end interval setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the accessory continuous action | operation apparatus operation | movement completion interval setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for jackpots concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition table at the time of jackpot completion which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for small hits concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table for small hits which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit performance table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit performance table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the ball game machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings, taking a pachinko game machine as an example.

[First embodiment]
<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 has a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pays out the game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). And a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball rental device. Further, the upper tray unit 8 has a built-in lamp that is lit during a predetermined input reception period and can be operated (input reception is possible), and a push button that can change the effect by pressing when the built-in lamp is lit. An expression frame effect button 13 is provided. This frame effect button 13 functions as a manual operation means that can be operated by the player.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball as a board surface partition member. A substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center ornament 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and allows the game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Acts as a sorting member (flow channel sorting means). In the present embodiment, the center ornament 48 is arranged at the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, whereby a flow path of game balls is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with a fixing screw or the like, and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 and displays on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (not shown) that provides a visual effect by its operation mode at an appropriate place.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided.

  In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. Note that the liquid crystal display device 36 described above displays the decorative symbols by the image in a synchronized manner with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is an on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether or not it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. This round number display device 39b functions as a round display means for informing a specified number of rounds related to a big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). The number of rounds is reported.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol starter: second starter) are provided. The normal variation winning device 41 is provided at the top and bottom, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. ing.

  The upper start port 34, which is the first special symbol start port, is referred to as a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). FIG. 1 is a prize-winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and is configured as a winning-rate fixed-type winning apparatus that does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). Yes. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an opening that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into a state (easy winning state) and a closed state (winning difficult state) that makes it difficult or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) is a winning port related to a normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol starting port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start opening 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left You may form only in the flow-down path | route 3b.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the “large winning opening closed state”, it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable blade 47 of the normal variation winning apparatus 41 is operated.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), and a prize can be awarded from either the left or right flow down path. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition that the game ball passes (wins) to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow down. It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 50, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won the above winning holes are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device according to the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall control (game operation control) related to game operations in general, and an effect control command from the main control unit 20. In response, an effect control unit (effect control means) 24 that generally controls (image, light, sound) effect operation control (performance appearance control) for the effect means, and a payout control board (payout) that performs payout control of prize balls Control means) 29 and a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from an external power supply (not shown). In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20: main control means)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ). The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. Although not shown, the main control unit 20 is a random number generation circuit for generating a random number for lottery related to a special symbol variation display game, a periodic interrupt to the Z80 system, and a pulse output generation function (bit rate) at a constant cycle. Generator), CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) that provides time measurement functions, and interrupt controller circuits that demonstrate interrupt functions (including interrupt disable functions) such as timer interrupts that give interrupt signals to the CPU ing. In addition, the main control unit 20 includes a functional unit (backup means) that backs up the return information necessary for returning the gaming state before the power shutdown when the power is shut off.

  Here, the CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog or equivalent). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 also includes a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning at the general winning opening 43 are connected. Detection signals from these can be received.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Are connected to a V-attacker solenoid (not shown) for controlling the opening and closing of the V-attacker, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the main display unit 38c. The main control unit 20 is connected to a round number display device 39b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified round number by jackpot.

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The hall computer HC is a management computer that manages the operating status of pachinko hall gaming machines based on information sent from the main controller 20, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. On the other hand, the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state (payout state signal) to the main control unit 20. On the main control unit 20 side, based on this payout state signal, whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally, specifically, there is a problem in payout of award balls (payout error: for example, a ball jam or a prize It is monitored whether or not the ball is not paid out.

  Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit an effect control command carrying information related to the special symbol variation display game to the effect control unit 24. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt is provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, LED light emission control, movable body accessory operation control, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  In addition, the production control unit 24 performs a light production and a sound production, a light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and the LED, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body accessory motor 61 is provided.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and the effect control unit 24 can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13. In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a movable object accessory motor 61 for controlling the operation of the movable object accessory, and the effect control unit 24 transmits a control signal for controlling the movable object accessory motor 61. It is possible.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized. The production of “production scenarios” in a broad sense is realized. Here, the “effect scenario” refers to an effect pattern in a broad sense that includes a decorative display variable display operation mode and various notice effects (elements that constitute an effect scenario such as a background effect, a reach effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect). .

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game is started in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the big win lottery result is “big hit”, it is in a predetermined “big hit” mode, otherwise In this case, the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” manner, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit”, the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “hit” is achieved, a special game state (hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In other words, the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable prize winning device 52 is actuated to close the open door 52b to open the special prize opening 50, and the opening of the game ball is permitted by the opening. . For this reason, the player can obtain a chance to acquire a large number of prize balls. In this embodiment, the big hit game is advantageous to the player because a chance to win a large number of prize balls can be obtained.

  The jackpot game is started after the big win is determined in the special symbol variation display game, the symbol pattern of the jackpot is derived and displayed in the decorative symbol variation display game, and the game ends. When the jackpot game starts, first, a jackpot start interval is set to indicate the start of the jackpot game, and an opening effect is performed here. After the opening effect is completed, a “round game” in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening operation of the opening door 52b is executed a plurality of times with a predetermined prescribed number of rounds (upper limit number of round games) as an upper limit. In one round game, either a predetermined round game time (maximum opening time) has elapsed since the start of the round game, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won a prize The process ends when one of the conditions is satisfied. Therefore, the opening / closing operation pattern (round game operation pattern) of the special winning opening is not necessarily the same for each round game due to the difference in timing when the round end condition is satisfied.

  In the opening / closing operation pattern of the open door 52b during the big hit game, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is set to a first predetermined time (for example, 29.8 seconds) at which the game ball is easy to win. A long open round game where the game ball is long open (long open) so that the game ball is easy to win, and a maximum predetermined opening time of the big winning port is a second predetermined time during which the game ball is difficult to win (for example, 0.1 There is a short open round game in which the game ball is short open (short open) so that it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize. In any round game, until the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening elapses, or a predetermined number of winning balls to the big prize opening 50 (maximum number of winnings: opened or expanded by one action of an accessory) The winning area of the big winning opening 50 is opened or expanded until the upper limit number of winning balls allowed for the winning opening is reached (for example, 9). Is closed. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  The round game is executed a plurality of times up to the prescribed number of rounds, and there are two types of hit games in the present embodiment. One is that only one kind of long open round game with a maximum open time (for example, 29.8 seconds) is used for the round game, and this long open round game is repeated several times up to the specified number of rounds. It is an open form (long open round continuous form). The other is a round game with a long open time (for example, 29.8 seconds) (long open round game) and a short game (for example, 0.1) (short open round game). Using two types, repeat the long open round game until the specified round in the middle of the specified number of rounds, switch from the next round of the specified round to the repeat of the short open round game, and this short open round game up to the specified number of rounds A long and short open form (continuous form of long and short open rounds) that is repeated a plurality of times. Therefore, the opening / closing operation pattern (round game operation pattern) of the big prize opening is not necessarily the same for each round game due to the difference between the long open mode and the long / short open mode. Furthermore, in the case of this embodiment, the big prize opening is opened only once during one round game, but multiple times are released during a long open one round game (for example, up to 29.8 seconds). The big prize opening may be controlled to open and close so as to have the round game operation pattern as described above. Including these points, the round game is controlled to open and close in a “predetermined pattern”.

  When the round game of the specified number of rounds is repeated, the big hit game shifts to the big hit end interval. The jackpot type is classified by focusing on the occurrence of the ending effect, and the jackpot type (7 symbol direct hit: FIG. 41) that generates the jackpot game in which the ending effect is performed corresponding to this jackpot end interval is referred to as “first jackpot”. ". In addition, a big hit type (7 symbols) that generates a big hit game that starts from the time before the big hit end interval and continues to flow until the big hit end interval ends (until the special symbol change display operation occurs). The non-per unit A, the non-seven symbol B, the scenarios BB1 to BB5, the seven per symbol C, and the non-seven per symbol D) are referred to as “second big hits”.

  The first jackpot is a jackpot belonging to a first group (group), which will be described later, when classified (grouped) according to the configuration form (excluding effects) of the jackpot game. Of the second big hits, A per non-seven symbols, B per non-symbol B, scenarios BB1 to BB5, and per seven non-symbols D are classified according to the configuration form of the hit game. Is a jackpot belonging to the first group, and C per 7 symbols is a jackpot belonging to the first group.

  The jackpot game is roughly divided into a jackpot start interval, a round game, and a jackpot end interval, which are generated in this order. The jackpot start interval and jackpot end interval are substantially omitted if necessary by setting the interval time to the shortest time in the program (4 ms of the main control side timer interruption period or a multiple thereof). And, as a round game, as a round game, “a big hit belonging to the first group” that repeatedly executes a long open round game that opens and closes the big winning opening so as to make it easy to win a game ball up to a specified number of rounds, As the round game, after the long open round game is executed a plurality of times, a short open round game in which the big winning opening is shortly opened and closed so that the game ball is difficult to win is repeatedly executed up to the prescribed number of rounds. "Big hits belonging to a group" are included.

  On the other hand, there are two types of big hits belonging to the first group: “7 symbol direct hit” and “7 symbol direct hit” (FIGS. 41 and 49), of which “7 symbol direct hit (FIG. 41)” In the case of a big hit game, an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is performed in correspondence with the big hit end interval, and the game ends (FIG. 41). Accordingly, the 7 symbol direct hit acts as the “first big hit”. “7 C per symbol (FIG. 49)” acts not as the first hit but as the second hit described below.

  The big hits belonging to the second group include “Around 7 other than 7 symbols”, “B per 7 different symbols”, “Scenarios BB1 to BB5”, and “D per 7 other than 7 symbols”. These jackpots are started from the time point before the jackpot end interval, and continue to flow until the special symbol variation display operation occurs. The same applies to the case of C per 7 symbols belonging to the first group. Therefore, they act as the “second jackpot”. Specifically, the time point before the jackpot end interval is the end ES2 of the last round game in the long open round game or the start end ES1 of the first round game of the short open round game (FIGS. 42 to 48). (See FIG. 49 to FIG. 50.) The start edge ES3 of the last round game in the long open round game or the start edge ES4 or end of the round game in the middle of the short open round game may be used.

  In this way, when the ending effect is started from a time point before the jackpot end interval, there is an advantage that the connection effect until the jackpot end interval that is executed during a period in which the short open round game is repeated a plurality of times becomes unnecessary. It is done. In addition, the player can recognize that the big hit has ended early without waiting for the arrival of the big hit end interval. In addition, the round start command, the round end command, and the big hit end command transmitted from the main control unit while the ending effect is flowing are ignored by the effect control unit, and the predetermined effect constituting the hitting effect It is not used as a production start opportunity for (part scenario) or as a round display production opportunity. Therefore, even if the effect control unit receives a round start command or a jackpot end command, it does not execute an opening effect or an ending effect based on the command. This will be described later. The round game execution period excluding the jackpot start interval and the jackpot end interval that are in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a jackpot game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, the “big hit (including the small hit)” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)' that draws which one is, and if it is' big hit ', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is' losing', the lottery type is drawn 'design lottery (winning A big win lottery including (winning type lottery) 'is performed, and based on the lottery result information, a variation pattern of the special symbol and a special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the big hit lottery result, special symbol variation time, etc.) and special stop symbol information ( A “decorative symbol designation command” including symbol lottery result information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24.

  In addition, there is a winning command as an effect control command indicating that each winning opening has been won. This winning command corresponds to each winning port when a winning ball to the upper starting port 34, the lower starting port 35, the large winning port 50, the normal symbol starting port 37, the general winning port 43, or the like is detected. Winning commands (upper starting port winning command, lower starting port winning command, large winning port winning command, general winning port command) are transmitted at a predetermined timing. In each of these winning commands, information on a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening (for example, the upper starting opening winning command has 3 winning balls and the lower starting opening winning command has a prize. 3 balls, 13 winning prize winning commands, 10 general winning prize commands, etc.). These winning commands are used in the acquired ball number counting process included in the winning command receiving process (step S717) in the receiving command analyzing process (see FIG. 30) described later.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (a reach effect via a reach state, which will be described later, or a pseudo-continuous effect with a pseudo-variable display operation). To explain in detail, the variation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into “hit variation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing variation pattern” in the case of loss, according to the big hit lottery result information. For example, a variation pattern for designating reach production (reach variation pattern) for designating the occurrence of reach production, a variation pattern for designating non-reach production (normal variation pattern) without designating the occurrence of reach production, pseudo-continuous production and reach production Reach fluctuation pattern for designating pseudo-continuous productions that specify multiple occurrences (reach fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuous production), normal fluctuation pattern for designating pseudo-continuous productions that specify the generation of pseudo-continuous productions and do not specify the occurrence of reach productions ( Normal variation pattern with pseudo-ream). In the case of the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, information specifying the number of pseudo-continuations can also be included.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol display device 39a displays the normal symbol represented by the LED in a variably displayed manner, and the normal symbol variation display game is started. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assistance”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state.

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the lower winning opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower winning opening. Also good.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of times of change of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserve memory number) of the number of the operation reservation balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and the maximum reserve memory number of each symbol may be different (for example, The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, etc.). Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the big hit lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a big hit type with high profit for the player, for example, the maximum reserved memory number on the special symbol 1 side is one and the maximum reserved memory on the special symbol 2 side is The number may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability), so that it is more than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 serves as a functional unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). A lottery number improvement state in which the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation prize winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state (normal state)”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes the “low probability state”, and the gaming state becomes “latent”. In the case of “probability state” or “probability change state”, at least the big hit lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. Further, during the big hit, all functions are deactivated, and basically, the player is placed in the same gaming state as the normal gaming state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time-shortening function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, the electric chew support state provided with the open extension function is handled as the “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). Focusing on the presence / absence of the electric chew support state, if the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”) is obtained. When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, the state is “electric chew support state present (hereinafter referred to as“ electric support state ”)”.

  In the present embodiment, in order to diversify the effects related to the gaming state, one internal gaming state is further classified and managed. For example, in the above “normal gaming state (low probability / no electric support)”, “normal gaming state A (normal A)”, “normal gaming state B (normal B)”, and “normal gaming state C (normal C)” Are included, and are managed as different game states. That is, even in the same normal gaming state, the conditions for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern selection mode: refer to the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) in FIG. 62 described later) are made different.

  As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. When paying attention to the “gaming state”, the same “normal gaming state”, but regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol, each of a plurality of types of gaming states (variation pattern selection mode) “normal A” to “normal C” Since the variation pattern corresponding to the game mode can be selected, an effect under the effect mode corresponding to each game state can be generated on the effect control unit 24 side. In this embodiment, while the internal gaming state is the same “latency state”, the gaming state relating to the occurrence of the production is managed as the above “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, An effect corresponding to the same gaming state as “normal A” to “normal C” under the normal gaming state can be generated.

  In the present embodiment, the types of “internal gaming state” when attention is paid to each function relating to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, the normal gaming state (normal state), the latent probability state, and the probability variation state Is included. On the other hand, the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) described later)” when focusing on the determination of the production, More than the types of internal gaming states, normal A, normal B, normal C, and probability change states are included. As described above, in this embodiment, the game state (internal game state) focused on the big win lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support is managed differently from the game state focused on the determination of the production, so that the internal game state is Even if they are the same, a plurality of types of effect modes can be realized. Thereby, the variation of the production under the same internal game state can be made rich. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the game state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode))) when paying attention to the determination of the internal game state and the effect is described. Without distinction, it may be simply referred to as “game state”.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Hit type: FIGS. 38 to 40)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform a big hit lottery for a plurality of types of hits. 39, as shown in FIG. 39, on the special figure 1 side, 7 symbols straight hit (16R long open condition with certain variation big hit), 7 symbols other than A (16R long and short open condition with certain variation big hit), 7 symbols Except B (12R long / short open condition with certain variation big hit), Scenario BB1 to BB4 (14R long open condition with certain variation big hit) (Scenario BB is an abbreviation of scenario battle bonus, sometimes written as scenarioBB), scenario BB5 (14R long / short) There is an open non-probable big hit), and 2R short open latent big hit. As shown in FIG. 40, for the special figure 2 side, there are C per 7 symbols (16R long open condition with probability variation big hit) and other than 7 symbols D (12R long and short open condition with positive variation big hit). Further, small hits (small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C) are also included in the multiple types of hits. Here, the “conditional probability variation jackpot” means that a game ball is placed in the V winning opening (specific winning area: not shown) provided inside or outside the big winning opening in a special round during the big winning game. This is because the transition to the probability change state is confirmed on the condition that the winning is made, that is, the V winning is made, and when the V winning is not made, the transition to the probability changing state is not performed.

  Although not shown in the figure, the V winning award is made easy by the operating state (operation or non-operation) of a predetermined opening / closing member (V attacker (V-AT): not shown). The open state (V winning easy state) and the closed state (V winning difficult state) that makes it difficult or impossible to win than the open state are convertible. The V winning opening is provided with a detection switch (V winning switch: not shown) for detecting a game ball that has entered the V winning opening. In the present embodiment, when the V attacker is inactive, a closed state (V winning impossible state) in which the winning to the V winning opening is impossible is held.

  In the above winning game with “conditional probable big hit”, the V-attacker is opened for a long time at least in a specific round (a period during which it is considered that there is a possibility of winning a V), and the player wins a V-win. You can get it reliably. That is, regardless of whether the V winning opening is provided in the large winning opening or outside the large winning opening, if the V attacker is opened long, the action of the game ball falling direction changing member in the gaming area 3a In addition, if the V prize opening is provided in the grand prize opening, unless the player intentionally prevents the player from making a V prize due to the physical internal structure in the big prize opening, It is possible to obtain a V prize at a prize rate of substantially 100%. For example, when the V prize opening is formed inside the grand prize opening, the V attacker is opened long along with the opening of the big prize opening, and the game ball is guided to the V prize opening by the internal structure of the big prize opening. The player can surely get a V prize. In addition, when the V prize opening is formed outside the big prize opening (for example, the right side of the center decoration 48, the upper part of the big prize opening 50, or the predetermined position below the big prize opening 50), the V attacker (V prize opening) ) May be regarded as an aspect of the special variable prize-winning device. In this case, in the special round, the V-attacker is controlled to be opened instead of the open door 52b, thereby causing the V-winning easy state to occur for a long time (long open). It can be configured so that the player can reliably obtain the V prize.

  In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, an example in which a V winning opening is provided in the special winning opening 50 will be described as an example. More specifically, the description will be made assuming that the V winner is opened together with the opening of the special winning opening 50 in the special round and the V winning opening is closed by the V attacker when the V winning is generated. Therefore, the V attacker in the present embodiment is opened together with the long opening of the special winning opening 50 in the special round, and is closed by the V winning before the long open large winning opening 50 is closed. The special round in which the V attacker is released is assigned to some of the long open rounds during the big hit game.

  In the hit types shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the special round in which the V attacker is long-opened (hereinafter abbreviated as “V open round”) is shown in FIG. Although it is not shown in the column of C per 7 symbols and D per other than 7 symbols in FIG. 40, it is basically 4R, 8R, and 12R, and these are exceptionally short open rounds. In this case, it does not fall under the V open round. 39 is the 4R, 8R, and 12R eyes in the case of 7 symbol direct hit, the 4R eye and the 8R eye in the case of A other than 7 symbols, and the 4R eye in the case of C per 7 symbols in FIG. , 8R and 12R, and in the case of D other than 7 symbols, it is 4R.

  FIG. 38 shows the winning probabilities for the big hits among them, including 7 symbols direct hit on the special figure 1 side, A per other than 7 symbols, B per other than 7 symbols, Scenario BB1, Scenario BB2, Scenario BB3, Scenario For BB4, scenario BB5, and 2R short open latency big hits, the winning probabilities are 2%, 5%, 5%, 7%, 7%, 7%, 17%. 46% and 4%. Here, the winning probability of scenario BB4 is set to 17%, which is higher than that of other scenarios BB1 to BB3 (7%). In the rebirth stage, the V attacker is released for a long time (V is easy to win) and the V-winner is given a “revival” type, so the probability is increased to increase the player's tension. Is. In Scenario BB5, the V Attacker in the Grand Prize Winner is released in the Challenge stage during the big hit game, but the opening time is very short and it is almost impossible to enter the V Winner. Because it is a hit type that makes it impossible to enter the probability change, reveals a challenge production failure in the production, and shifts to a short time after the big hit game, the winning probability is increased to 46%, Increases the rate of occurrence. By providing such a hit type, in this embodiment, the probability variation entry rate is set to about 50%, the player is moderately tensioned, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In addition, the winning probabilities of C per 7 symbols on the special figure 2 side and D per other than 7 symbols are 85% and 15%. Since the C per 7 symbols is a 16R long opening where about 2000 balls can be obtained, the winning probability is increased to provide the player with an attractive gameplay. The winning D other than 7 symbols is a hit of the actual 4R length opening where about 500 rounds are obtained, so the winning probability is relatively low.

  Among these hits, 16R long open condition probability variation big hit (7 symbols direct hit), 16R long short open probability change big hit (Any other than 7 symbols), 12R long short open condition positive variation big hit (B outside 7 symbols B), 14R long short Probable big hit with open conditions (scenario BB1 to BB4), 14R long short open non-probable big hit (scenario BB5), 2R short open latent positive big hit, 16R long open condition with positive variable big hit (C per 7 symbols), 12R long short open condition The accrual variation big hit (D / non 7 symbols hit) is a hit belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device, and “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type that does not trigger the condition device. It is. Here, the “condition device” is a device (means) whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or This means that a game ball is activated when it passes through a specific area in the big prize opening. Both the hits belonging to the “big hit” type and the hits (small hits) belonging to the “non-big hit” type are hits that trigger the transition to a special gaming state involving opening / closing operations of the big prize opening. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the above "Big hits" type, the probability variation big hit with 16R long open condition (7 symbols direct hit), the probability variable big hit with 16R long and short open conditions (A per hit other than 7 symbols), 12R long and short open condition with probability change big hit (7 symbols) Other than B), 14R long / short open condition probability variation big hit (scenarios BB1 to BB4), 2R short open latent probability big hit, 16R long open condition exact variation large hit (C per 7 symbols), 12R long / short open condition exact variation large hit ( In the case of D) other than 7 symbols, V winnings are surely considered in a special round, so that the gaming state after the big hit game is at least a gaming state with a high probability state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability). It is positioned as a big hit belonging to “probability big hit” to be shifted to the state). On the other hand, “14R long / short open non-probable big hit (scenario BB5)” is that V winning is virtually impossible as described above, so that the game state after the big hit game has a high probability state. It is positioned as a big hit that belongs to the “non-probable big hit” to shift to a gaming state with at least a low-probability state without being transferred to. In this specification, for the convenience of explanation, unless otherwise required, each conditional probability variation jackpot type is treated in the same row as “probability variation jackpot”, and scenario BB5 is treated in the same row as “non-probable variation jackpot”. Note that “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

(4-2. Per game: FIGS. 41 to 50)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described. 39 to 40 show an outline of the action pattern and effect contents for each winning type, and FIGS. 41 to 50 show the details of the big hit game. Special figure 1 hit types are 7 symbols direct hit, non-7 symbols per A, 7 non-design per B, scenarios BB1 to BB5, and special figure 2 hit types are other than C and 7 symbols per 7 symbols. There is a hit D.

(4-2-1.7 winning game by direct contact with symbols: Fig. 41)
7 design direct hit (16R long open condition probability variation big hit) is a hit that belongs to the first group, the big hit game has a prescribed number of rounds of 16 rounds, all round games from 1R to 16R It consists of a long open (long open) time operation pattern (referred to as “16R full open”). Of these 16 rounds, the special round (V open round) in which the V attacker is open for a long time is not shown in the column of 7 symbols in FIG. 39, but is the 4R, 8R, and 12R. In this round, the V attacker is open for a long time so that the player can reliably win the V prize. In the present embodiment, as described above, the V winning opening is provided in the large winning opening 50, and when the V winning is made, the V attacker closes the V winning opening. At this time, the special winning opening 50 is closed when the maximum opening time or the maximum number of winnings is reached. In addition, the V opening round can be generated at different round numbers depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of occurrences can be provided one or more times. Actually, a V prize can be obtained substantially in the first V opening round (here, 4R), so in the following, unless otherwise required, V It is assumed that a prize is generated.

  An effect scenario (see WINTBL-P0 in FIG. 64) for generating a hit effect for direct hitting is associated with this jackpot game effect scenario. Here, “direct hit” is a jackpot type in which an effect of notifying the probability change big hit decision (probability change finalization effect) appears in the effect during the symbol variation display game by the winning, When this probability change effect appears, it can be known that the current game result is “direct hit”. In other words, the “direct hit” is different from the “scenario BB” in which it is possible to know whether or not this big hit is a promising big hit through the big hit game. It is a jackpot type that the player expects most in that it is not necessary to worry that it may be a non-probable big hit.

  In addition, the “long opening time” means that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in one round game can reach the maximum winning number (for example, 9) within the time. In this embodiment, the long open time is set to “29.8 seconds” (this is shown in FIGS. 41 to 50 as “ 29S ") is set.

  After the round game is started and the big prize opening 50 is opened, when the maximum opening time has elapsed, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is ended. If the prescribed number of rounds has not been reached, after a predetermined time interval between rounds (hereinafter abbreviated as INT between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined interval time between rounds has elapsed, the next round game is entered.

  In other words, after the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the number of winnings in the big prize opening reaches the maximum number of winning (for example, 9) or when the above maximum opening time has elapsed. The special winning opening closing condition (round end condition) is established, the special winning opening 50 is closed, and the current round game is ended. If the specified number of rounds (16 rounds here) has not been reached, the next round game is entered with a predetermined interval time between rounds. This is not only in the case of 7 symbol direct hit (16R long open condition with certain variation large hit), but also with other than 7 symbol later described below (16R long / short open condition with certain variation large hit) and 7 symbols other than B (12R long / short open condition with certain variation). Big hit), scenarios BB1 to BB4 (14R long open condition with probability variable big hit), scenario BB5 (14R long short open non-probable big hit), and 2R short open latent positive hit, C per 7 symbols (16R long open condition with positive variable big hit), The same applies to “long opening action hit game” in hits D other than 7 symbols (probability large hit with 12R long and short open conditions).

  Note that the “interval between rounds” following the round game is basically the “remaining ball discharge time” and the next round after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, except for those after the last round game. It consists of the sum of the “interval before opening” until the game is started. The “interval between rounds” after the last round game is composed of “remaining ball discharge time”. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. As the time width, the big winning opening is closed. Sufficient time is required until the game ball won immediately before passing through a winning detection switch (large winning opening sensor 52a) formed in the large winning opening. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. A time width (for example, 20 ms) that defines the interval interval. Even if the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during the pre-opening interval, the game ball is regarded as an illegal prize due to an illegal act and is treated as invalid. However, the interval time between rounds can be configured not by the sum of the remaining ball discharge time and the interval time before opening but only by the remaining ball discharge time of 1980 ms. In addition, after the last round game, since the big hit determination flag has already been lowered to OFF (00H), it is not necessary to provide an interval time before opening to prevent fraud. For this reason, the “interval time between rounds” after the last round game consists only of “remaining ball discharge time (1.98 seconds)”, but if necessary, for example, to secure the performance time, Can be longer than the normal 1.98 seconds.

(4-2-2-2.7 winning games other than symbols by A: Fig. 42)
The 7 A (16R long / short open condition probability variation big hit) is a hit that belongs to the second group, and the big hit game has a prescribed number of rounds of 16 rounds, of which 1R to 10R round winning prizes The maximum opening time of 50 is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in the remaining round games from 11R to 16R is “short opening (short opening) time”. '0.1 seconds'. In addition, although not shown in the column of hit A except for the 7 symbols in FIG. 39, the V-opening rounds are the 4th and 8th rounds. In other words, the winning game by A per other than 7 symbols is a total of 10R from 1R to 10R in the long open round game (referred to as “10R full open”), followed by a total of 6R from 11R to 16R. Is a short open round game (referred to as “6R short open”). Hereinafter, this is abbreviated as “10R full open + 6R short open”. An effect scenario (see WINTBL-PA in FIG. 64) for generating an “effect of A per hit other than 7 symbols” is associated as an effect scenario for the big hit game. Here, the “short opening time” is a time width that is defined as an opening time that makes it difficult to win a prize winning itself. In the present embodiment, the game ball drop direction changing member (center decoration 48 or game nail), or the performance of the launching device (for example, the rate of continuous firing of the game ball per unit time) or the formation position of the big prize opening, etc. It is impossible to reach the “maximum number of winnings” which is one of the conditions for closing the big winning opening within the “short opening time”. In the short-opening round game, the prize winning opening 50 is opened only for a short opening time, so that substantially no prize balls can be obtained. Precisely, there is a possibility that a winning in the big winning opening 50 may also occur, but the possibility is extremely low because the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in each round game is set to a short opening time, Virtually no prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, a big hit game by hitting A (10R full open + 6R short open) other than the 7 symbols (hereinafter referred to as “16R long / short open condition probability variation big hit game A”) is a big hit game by 7 symbols direct hit (16R full open). (Hereinafter referred to as “16R long release condition-accepted variable jackpot game 1”), the jackpot game is given a relatively lower profit (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for six rounds).

(A winning game by B other than symbols in Fig. 4-2-3.7: Fig. 43)
B (except for 7 symbols) is a hit that belongs to the second group, and the big hit game has 12 specified rounds, of which 1R to 10R are large in each round game. The maximum opening time of the winning opening 50 is set to “29.8 seconds” of the “long opening time”. From the remaining 11R to 12R, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game is “short opening time”. '0.1 seconds'. Further, although not shown in the column B per hit except for the 7 symbols in FIG. In other words, the winning game by B other than 7 symbols is a total of 10R from 1R to 10R made a long open round game (10R full open), followed by all 2R from 11R to 12R in total. The game consists of short open round games (2R short open) (hereinafter abbreviated as “10R full open + 2R short open”). Is associated with an effect scenario (see WINTBL-PB in FIG. 64). In the short open round game, almost no prize ball can be obtained, so by the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “12R long and short open condition positive change big hit game B”) by hitting B (10R long open + 2R short open) except for these 7 symbols The profit obtained is the same or almost the same as the profit obtained in the game variable A with 16R long / short open condition with positive A per 10 A (10R full open + 6R short open) except for 7 symbols.

(4-2-4. Winning game according to scenario BB1: FIG. 44)
Scenario BB1 (14R long open condition probability variation jackpot) is a hit that belongs to the second group, and the jackpot game has a specified number of rounds of 14 rounds, of which the winning prize port 50 in each round game from 1R to 10R The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each of the remaining rounds of 11R, 12R, and 14R is “first short opening time”. The maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in the 13R round game is set to “0.08 seconds” of the “second short opening time”. The V open rounds are the 4th and 8th rounds (see the scenario BB1 field in FIG. 39 (long (29S) × (V-AT))). In other words, the winning games according to scenario BB1 are “10R full open” in which all 10R from 1R to 10R are long open round games, and “4R short open” in which all from 11R to 14R are short open round games. (Hereinafter abbreviated as “10R full release + 4R short release”), and an effect scenario (WINTBL in FIG. 64) that generates “scenario battle bonus first successful effect” as an effect scenario for the per game. -P1) is associated. Since there are almost no prize balls at the time of short opening, the profit obtained by the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “scenario BB1 game”) by this scenario BB1 (10R full open + 4R short open) is based on A per other than 7 symbols Same or almost the same as in the case of 16R long / short open condition probability variation big hit game A (10R full open + 6R short open) or 12R long / short open condition positive variable big hit game B (10R full open + 2R short open) Become.

(4-2-5. Winning game according to scenario BB2: FIG. 45)
Scenario BB2 (14R long opening condition with certainty jackpot) is a hit belonging to the second group, and the jackpot game has a specified number of rounds of 14 rounds, of which 1R-3R, 5R-11R round winning game The maximum opening time of 50 is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each of the remaining rounds of the 4R, 12R, and 14R is “1st The “short opening time” is set to “0.1 second”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in the 13th round game is set to “second short opening time” of “0.08 second”. The V open round is the 8th R (see the column for scenario BB2 in FIG. 39). In other words, in this scenario BB2, a total of 10R from 1R to 3R and 5R to 11R is a long open round game, and a total of 4R from 4R and 12R to 14R is a short open round game. It consists of “4R short open”. Therefore, the scenario BB2 also includes “10R full open + 4R short open” as in the scenario BB1. However, this is associated with an effect scenario (see WINTBL-P2 in FIG. 64) for generating a “scenario battle bonus second successful effect” as an effect scenario for the hit game. Since almost no prize ball is obtained during short opening, the profits obtained by the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “scenario BB2 game”) by this scenario BB2 (10R full opening + 4R short opening) are the same as those of the scenario BB1 game. Identical or nearly identical.

(4-2-6. Winning game according to scenario BB3: FIG. 46)
Scenario BB3 (14R long open condition probability variation big hit) is a hit that belongs to the second group, and the big hit game has 14 rounds, of which 1R-3R, 5R-7R, 9R-12R round games The maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 is set to “29.8 seconds” of the “long opening time”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each of the remaining 4R, 8R, and 14R round games. Set “0.1 second” for “first short opening time” and “0.08 seconds” for “second short opening time” for the maximum opening time of big winning opening 50 in the 13th round game. Is done. Further, the V-opening round is the 12th round (see the column of scenario BB3 in FIG. 39). That is, in this scenario BB3, the total 10R of 1R to 3R, 5R to 7R, 9R to 12R is long open round game, “10R full open”, 4R, 8R, and 4R from 13R to 14R are short. It consists of “4R short opening” which is an open round game. Therefore, the scenario BB3 also includes “10R full open + 4R short open”. However, this is associated with an effect scenario (see WINTBL-P3 in FIG. 64) for generating the “scenario battle bonus third successful effect” as the effect scenario for the hit game. Since award balls are hardly obtained at short opening, the profits obtained by the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “scenario BB3 game”) by this scenario BB3 (10R full release + 4R short release) are the scenario BB1 game and scenario BB2 It will be the same or nearly the same as in the game.

(4-2-7. Winning Game by Scenario BB4: Fig. 47)
Scenario BB4 (14R long opening condition-accepted variable jackpot) is a hit belonging to the second group, and the jackpot game is the same as the jackpot game according to scenario BB3, and consists of “10R full opening + 4R short opening”. However, an effect scenario (see WINTBL-P4 in FIG. 64) that causes the “scenario battle bonus 3rd success (resurrection) effect” is associated as the effect scenario for the per game. The profit obtained by the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “scenario BB4 game”) by the scenario BB4 is also the same as or substantially the same as that of the scenario BB3 game.

(4-2-8. Winning games according to scenario BB5: Fig. 48)
Scenario BB5 (14R long / short open non-probable big hit) is a hit that belongs to the second group, and the big hit game has 14 rounds, of which 1R-3R, 5R-7R, 9R-11R round games The maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 is set to “29.8 seconds” of the “long opening time”, and the maximum winning opening 50 in each of the remaining 4R, 8R, 12R, and 14R round games is set. The opening time is set to “0.1 second” of the “first short opening time”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in the 13th round game is “0. 08 seconds'. Here, in the case of scenario BB5, the V-opening round is not substantially provided. This is because the V attacker is short-opened (short-open) at the 4th, 8th, and 12th rounds, but V winning is virtually impossible (see the scenario BB5 column in FIG. 39). That is, in this scenario BB5, a total of 9R from 1R to 3R, 5R to 7R, 9R to 11R is a long open round game, “9R full open”, 4R, 8R, and 12R to 14R, total 5R is short It consists of “5R short opening” as an open round game (hereinafter referred to as “9R full opening + 5R short opening”). Therefore, the profit obtained by the hit game (hereinafter referred to as “scenario BB5 game”) in scenario BB5 (9R full open + 5R short open) in the case of non-probable big hit is the scenario BB1 to scenario BB4 in the case of probable change (whichever Is also lower than the profit obtained from scenario BB1 game to scenario BB4 game by 10R full release + 4R short release), and there is a difference in the number of winning balls for one round. As the scenario scenario for the scenario BB5 game, an effect scenario (refer to WINTBL-P5 in FIG. 64) for generating the “scenario battle bonus third failure effect” is associated.

  In this embodiment, two types of “first short opening time” “0.1 second” and “second short opening time” “0.08 second” are used as the short opening time. However, they may be used in a unified manner.

(4-2-2-9.7 winning game by C per symbol: Fig. 49)
C per 7 symbols (16R long open condition with probability variation big hit) is a big hit belonging to the second group and is also referred to as 7 symbol immediate hit. The jackpot game consists of “16R full open” in which the specified number of rounds is 16 rounds as in the case of 7 symbols, and all 16Rs are long open round games. Although not shown in the column of C per symbol, they are the 4Rth, 8Rth, and 12Rth. As an effect scenario for the big hit game, an “immediate hit effect (C effect per 7 symbols)” effect scenario (see WINTBL-PC in FIG. 64) that generates a hit effect for immediate hitting is associated. Here, “immediate hit” is the same as “direct hit”, and by winning, an effect (probability change finalization effect) for notifying the probability change big hit decision appears in the effect during the symbol variation display game. The jackpot type. Therefore, as a difference from “7 symbol direct hit”, the winning game by C per 7 symbol (hereinafter referred to as “16R long open condition probability variable big hit game C”) is based on winning the winning lottery in FIG. However, the winning game is associated with an effect scenario (WINTBL-PC in FIG. 64) that generates an “effect of C (immediate hit) per 7 symbols”, whereas a winning game (16R in direct hit with 7 symbols). The probabilistic big hit game 1) with a long open condition is based on the fact that the winning lottery of “Special Figure 1” is won, and an effect scenario (WINTBL− in FIG. Both are different in that P0) is associated.

(4-2-10.7 winning games other than symbols by D: Fig. 50)
A hit D other than 7 symbols (12R long and short open condition probability variation big hit) is a big hit belonging to the second group, and the big hit game has a prescribed round number of 12 rounds. Among these, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in the round games from 1R to 4R is set to “29.8 seconds” of the “long opening time”, and the remaining winning openings 50 in the round games from 5R to 12R are set. The maximum opening time is set to “0.1 second” of “short opening time”. Further, the V open round is not shown in the column of D per portion other than the 7 symbols in FIG. 40, but is the 4Rth and 8Rth. In other words, the winning game by D other than 7 symbols is a game in which 1R to 4R total 4R is a long open round game (referred to as “4R full open”), and a subsequent 8R of 5R to 12R is a short open round game. (Hereinafter referred to as “8R short open”) (hereinafter abbreviated as “4R full open + 8R short open”). The winning game with a winning D other than 7 symbols is associated with an effect scenario (refer to WINTBL-PD in FIG. 64) for generating “an effect of D other than 7 symbols” as an effect scenario for the winning game. Since there are almost no prize balls in the round game with short opening, the big hit game with D other than these 7 symbols (4R full open + 8R short open) (hereinafter referred to as “12R long and short open condition probability variation big hit game D”) Is a big hit game with a relatively lower profit than the hit game (16R long release condition with probability variable big hit game C) with 7 symbols per C (16R full open) (in this embodiment, for 8 rounds) There is a difference in the number of winning balls).

  As described above, the jackpot types that are subject to the internal lottery (big hit lottery) on the special figure 2 side are all jackpot types for which the occurrence of a special round is promised. In this respect, the jackpot type (in this embodiment, scenario BB5) for which the occurrence of a special round is not promised is different from the special figure 1 side that is subject to internal lottery. In other words, the special figure 2 side has a big hit lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 side. The player gains a promising big hit on the special figure 1 side and comes to the game with great expectation as to whether or not to obtain the lottery opportunity on the special figure 2 side.

(4-2-11.2R short-open latency big hit game)
The 2R short-open latency big hit is a big hit belonging to the third group that repeatedly executes a short open round game that is closed for a specified number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened shortly so that it is difficult for the game ball to win. The specified number of rounds in the big hit game (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent big hit game”) is two rounds. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in one round game is set to 0.1 seconds of the “short opening time” (the same as the first short opening time in the big hit game described above). . An effect scenario that generates a “latency expectation effect” for expecting a hidden probability state that is a contingent probability changed state as an effect scenario for the hit game in the hit game by the 2R latent probability big hit game (See WINTBL-P7 in FIG. 64). Here, the “short opening time” is defined as a time span in which it is difficult to win a prize winning itself. In the present embodiment, the game ball drop direction changing member (center decoration 48 or game nail), or the performance of the launching device (for example, the rate of continuous firing of the game ball per unit time) or the formation position of the big prize opening, etc. It is impossible to reach the “maximum number of winnings” which is one of the conditions for closing the big winning opening within the “short opening time”. In 2R latent big hit games, the big winning opening 50 is only opened for a short time and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, so it is a big hit game with virtually no winning balls. (Accurately, there is a possibility that a winning of the big winning opening 50 may also occur, but since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, the possibility is extremely low. Virtually no prize balls can be obtained).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent large hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, 16R long release condition with probability variation big hit game 1 or 16R long and short release condition with probability variation big hit game A or 12R long and short release condition with probability variation big hit game B or scenario BB1 game so that a winning to the big winning opening 50 is allowed to some extent. ~ You may set the same long opening time as scenario BB5 game, 16R long open condition with probability change big hit game C or 12R long short open condition with probability change big hit game D, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the above maximum wins. However, even if it is set to an opening time (an intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) that can secure a certain number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 good. Further, in order to vary the number of winning balls (special prize number: T1Y), the maximum number of winning prizes may be set to a different number depending on the type of jackpot.

(4-2-12. Winning game with small hit (small hit A-small hit C))
The small hit is a hit belonging to the third group, and in the hit game (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening 50 is opened twice, and the maximum of the big prize opening 50 per time is the maximum. The opening time is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time of the 2R latent chance game, and the interval time from the closing of the first big winning opening 50 to the opening of the second big winning opening 50 is 2R The same time width as the interval time between rounds of the big hit game is set. Also, regarding the closing condition of the big winning opening 50 in the small hit game, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, 9) Either one of the conditions is satisfied. This is also the same as the 2R latent big hit game. That is, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game.

  Since the “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the “condition device”, a long open round game such as “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game was realized, and it seemed as if the 2R short open big hit big win was won. It is possible to dress like In addition, the hit effect during the small hit game (the effect that appears during the hit game) is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the hit effect during the 2R latent large hit game. It has become. In other words, the action related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short open latency big hit, and which hit game is executed as viewed from the player side. Is difficult or impossible to identify. As a result, even if the player wins a small hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation for winning the 2R short open latent big hit.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game.

(4-3-1.16R / 12R / 14R Conditional Probable Large Change Game State)
16R, 12R, and 14R conditional probability big hits, that is, 7 symbols straight hit, 7 symbols other than A, 7 symbols other than B, scenarios BB1 to BB4, 7 symbols per C, 7 other than D symbols after each game As shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the game, the game is shifted to the “probability change state” on condition that the V prize is won during the big win game. In this “probable change state”, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”) is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, Special symbol fluctuation display games 1 and 2 total number of executions (total number of special symbol 1 and 2 fluctuations)): For example, 70 times) Big hit (excluding small hits) until the end or within the predetermined number of times Until the game is finalized (“until the jackpot is finalized” may be when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the jackpot and the occurrence of the jackpot game is confirmed or when the jackpot is won. ) When the probability variation state continues and the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the probability variation state is terminated, and the next game “Normal A (internal game state is normal game) Is adapted to be transferred to the state) ". The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a special symbol variation display game that has been completed a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit (excluding a small hit) after being shifted to a gaming state in which the big hit lottery probability is at least high. This is a probability-variation machine (number-of-times probability variation machine (ST machine)) that terminates the high probability state and shifts the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability. Hereinafter, the upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation number) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number” as necessary.

(4-3-2.14R non-probability big hit game state after game end)
In the 14R non-probable big hit game, that is, the big hit game of scenario BB5, the V open round is not generated, and it is prohibited to enter the V prize by being physically configured not to enter the V winning opening. For this reason, after the big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win, the game is shifted to the “time saving state”. When the “short time state” is reached, the short time state is maintained until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the short time state is finished and the next game is shifted to the “normal state”. Regarding the prohibition of V winning, in the big hit game of scenario BB5, even if the player enters the V winning opening, the detection signal by the V winning switch is not accepted (for example, the detection signal by the detecting switch). Can be prohibited).

(4-3-3.2R gaming state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latent large hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning is “normal A” to “normal C” (when the internal game state is a normal game state or a latent state), “normal C (internal game state) Is in the “probability state”), if it is “probability change state”, it is shifted to “probability change state”. The “normal C” here is managed as the same gaming state as the “normal C” in which the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state as described above, but the substance is that the internal gaming state is in the latent state. “Normal C (latency)”.

  When “normal C” after the 2R latent probability winning game ends, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is until the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) ends or within the predetermined number of times. The “normal C” continues until the big hit is confirmed, and when the special symbol fluctuation display game is finished without the big win being decided within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended and the “normal C” is started from the next game. “A”. That is, when the specified number of STs is divided into the first half section and the second half section, the first half section is placed under “normal C” and the second half section is placed under “normal A”. Therefore, when the transition is made from “normal C” to “normal A”, the internal gaming state is shifted to “normal A” in the latent state.

  The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game including “normal C” in the first half section after the above-described latent state becomes “normal A” or until the end of the specified ST number (70 times), or “Normal A” continues until the big hit (including small hits) is confirmed within the specified number of STs, and the special symbol variation display game is terminated without the big hit (including small hits) being determined within the specified number of STs. Sometimes, the high probability state ends, and the next game shifts to “normal A” in the normal game state. In other words, after the “normal C” is reached after the 2R latent big hit game ends, if the big win is not won within the specified number of STs (for example, 70 times), the internal game state is “normal C” in the latent state. (Special symbol variation display game execution count 30 times: normal C (latency probability)) ”→“ Normal A (special symbol variation display game execution count 40 times): Normal A (latency probability) ”(ST regulation) The game state transition is “normal A (normal)” in which the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Among these types of winning, “16R long and short opening condition probability variation big hit” (7 symbols direct hit) by special lottery drawing of special figure 1 is closed after opening the big prize opening long so that game balls can win easily. The first jackpot game is a jackpot belonging to the first group that repeatedly executes a long open round game up to the specified number of rounds, and is transferred to the first jackpot game that gives the player the greatest profit (number of winning balls). It functions as a “first value jackpot” for shifting to a first privilege gaming state (in this embodiment, a probable variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the game ends.

  In addition, “16R, 12R, 14R long and short open condition probability variation big hits (A except 7 symbols, B outside 7 symbols, Scenarios BB1 to BB4, D outside 7 symbols D)” by the lottery drawing of Special Figure 1 This is a big hit belonging to the second group in which a short open round game is repeatedly executed up to a specified number of rounds after a round game is executed a plurality of times, so that a game ball is difficult to win, and then the big prize opening is opened shortly and then closed. Transition to the second jackpot game in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit to be provided to the player is relatively smaller than the first jackpot game (for example, 10R length opening). And function as a “second value jackpot” for shifting to the first privilege gaming state after the end of the second jackpot game. In addition, “14R long and short open uncertain big hit (scenario BB5)” by special lottery in FIG. 1 is a big hit belonging to the second group, and is shifted to the second big hit game, and the end of the second big hit game. “Third value of the third value” is transferred to a second privileged game state (in this embodiment, a short time state) which is advantageous to the player later than the normal gaming state but has less profit for the player than the first privileged state. It functions as a “hit”.

  In addition, the 16R long open condition probability variation big hit (7 symbols per C) in the special drawing 2 is a big hit belonging to the first group, and is the first big hit game that gives the player the greatest profit. One of the “first value jackpots” to be shifted to the first privilege gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the first jackpot game is finished. Function as. In addition, the 12R long / short open condition probability change big hit (D / R7 other than 7 symbols) in the special drawing 2 is a big hit belonging to the second group, and has a profit to be given to the player over the first big hit game. The game is shifted to the second big hit game in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so as to have a relatively small number of long open times (for example, 4R long open), and after the second big hit game ends, It functions as one of the "second value jackpots" for shifting to the special gaming state.

  In addition, the above “2R short open latency big hit” is a big hit belonging to the third group that repeatedly executes a short open round game that is closed for a predetermined number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened shortly so that the game ball is difficult to win. Then, the game is shifted to the fourth jackpot game in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first to third jackpot games. A fourth privilege gaming state (in the present embodiment, “latency probability state”) that provides relatively less profit to the player than the first to third privilege gaming states after the end of the fourth jackpot game. It functions as a “big value 4 jackpot” to be transferred to.

  In the present embodiment, at least when a transition is made to a high probability state, until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (specified ST number), or within a predetermined number of times, the big hit is confirmed or won It was explained that the high probability state continues until However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation display game, another big hit (non-ST probability variable big hit) may be provided that keeps the high probability state until the next big hit is confirmed or won (this implementation) One kind of big hit of the form (for example, C per 7 symbols) may be a non-ST probability variable big hit). In addition, “ST probability variation big hit”, which is a trigger for shifting to the number of times cut probability variation such as long open probability variation big hit or long and short release probability variation big hit of the present embodiment, is a timing for transition to a latent probability state such as 2R short release probability big hit. One or more types of “latent probability big hits”, “time big hits” that trigger the transition to the short-time state, or “non-ST probable big hits” that trigger the transition to the non-ST probability change state can be included. In addition, a “normal big hit” may be provided that does not give any benefit after a winning game, that is, an opportunity to shift to the normal gaming state.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
After the small hit game, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed. However, the transition control of the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode (see variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) of FIG. 62 described later))” relating to the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (determination of production) is performed. ing. As a result, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after the 2R latent big hit game are shifted to the same game state, both are allowed to stay in the same production mode, that is, after the small hit game. Also, the production under the same production mode as that after the 2R latent hit game is generated. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of rushing into a high probability state that the player may have won the 2R short open latent big hit and moved to the “latent state”. Yes. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state after each small hit game when the small hit A to small hit C is won will be described in detail.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when the small hit A is won)
After the small hit game by “small hit A”, the game state of the transfer destination varies depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal A” to “normal C”, it is transferred to “normal B”, and if it is “probable change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. When the “normal B” is reached, the “normal B” is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. ”Is continued, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without determining the big hit within the predetermined number of times, the“ normal B ”is ended and the next game is shifted to“ normal A ”. Yes.

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal A” to “normal C”, it is transferred to “normal C”, and if it is “probable change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. When the “normal C” is achieved by the small hit B, the big hit is made until the special symbol variation display game is executed for the second predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “normal C” continues until it is confirmed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big win within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended, and the next game is changed to “normal A”. It is supposed to be migrated.

(4-4-3. Game state after the end of the small hit game when winning the small hit C)
After the small hit game by the small hit C, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal A” to “normal C”, it is transferred to “normal C”, and if it is “probable change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit C, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is the third predetermined number (preferably, “the second predetermined number <the third predetermined number” and “ Number of times satisfying at least one of the relations of “first predetermined number of times = third predetermined number of times. In this embodiment, for example, 30 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times When the “normal C” continues and the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. It is like that. Accordingly, the “normal C” transferred due to the above-mentioned small hit C winning and the “normal C” transferred due to the above small hit B winning are in the same gaming state. However, the stay period of “Normal C” ends in 30 special symbol fluctuation display games (“Normal C (30 times)” in the figure) or 15 times (“Normal C (15 in the figure)”) Times))).

  Here, the above-mentioned “normal C” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent probability winning game is over. For this reason, when the mode is shifted to “Normal C” due to 2R short open latency big win, small B win, or small C win, each of the production modes (“Normal C” related productions) Will be staying in the “normal C effect mode” described later), and whether or not the internal gaming state is the “latent probability state”, that is, whether or not the big hit lottery probability state is a high probability state. Concealed. In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating status of the special symbol probability changing function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, it is noted that the mechanical gaming operation state that appears on the appearance is the same state (both are ' By preventing the player from perceiving what kind of gaming state from the stage of production, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a high probability state. Yes. In particular, if the special symbol variation display game is ended 15 times without winning a big win or a small win, and the next game also stays in a production mode corresponding to “normal C”, the small win C win is won. Or because it is limited to 2R short open latency big win, expectation that “normal C (30 times)” may have entered a higher probability state than “normal C (15 times)” Will increase even more.

  Even in the case of transition from “normal C” to “normal A”, in order to leave the player with a high probability state expectation, the “normal C” continuation count is less than the specified ST count. Preferably there is. Further, according to the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol), not only the transition from the “normal C” to the “normal A” but also the special symbol variation display game during the stay in “normal C”. After the number of executions ends, a predetermined transition lottery is performed every time the special symbol variation display game is executed. If the transition lottery is won, the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” good. For example, if 2R short open latency probability change big hit or small hit C is won, after the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the transition lottery is performed, and if small hit B is won, the second predetermined number of times After finishing (for example, 15 times), the above-mentioned transfer lottery is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable to forcibly shift to “normal A” when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the transition lottery until the specified number of STs ends.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that provide effects related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, in the above-mentioned production mode, “normal A production mode” which produces an effect related to this during the “normal A” stay, and “normal B production which produces the production related to this during the“ normal B ”stay. Depending on the game state, such as “Mode”, “Normal C effect mode”, which produces an effect related to this during “Normal C” stay, and “Probability change effect mode”, which produces an effect related to this during stay. A plurality of types of production modes are provided. In addition, the “normal C effect mode” corresponding to the “normal C” is an effect in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is concealed and the player is given an expectation of a high probability state. Plays the role of “secret mode”.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state Including the information related to the gaming state managed by the main control unit side, such as designating that the game is to be transferred to “a specific effect control command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a gaming state There are a specified command, a short-time end command, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (“big hit start command”, “round start command”, “V winning command”, “round end command”, “big hit end command”), etc. ) ”Based on the game state managed on the main control unit 20 side, and configured to be able to control transition between multiple types of performance modes. It has been. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. Specifically, in the form of keeping the consistency with the main control unit 20 side by grasping the internal game state and the variation pattern allocation designation number managed on the main control unit 20 side by the above specific production control command, This is configured to be manageable.

  Also, in each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative symbol is, for example, “normal” so that the player can understand what kind of game state the player is staying in. Under “A production mode”, a background production reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background production in which a background image of a cherry tree is displayed: the first background production), and under “normal B production mode”, the season “summer” is associated. Background effect (for example, background effect for displaying a background image of the sea: second background effect), under the “normal C effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “autumn” (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree) Displayed background effect: 3rd background effect) Under “Probability change effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'winter' (for example, a background effect displaying a snowy mountain background image: a fourth background effect) Is Toggles control.

  Note that the “normal C effect mode” of the present embodiment is the same effect mode regardless of whether the internal game state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal game state (low probability state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. “Genuine normal C effect mode (first hidden effect mode)” under the latent state (high probability state) and “Gasse normal C under normal game state (low probability state) according to the internal game state An effect mode (second secret effect mode) ”may be provided, and transition control to these effect modes may be performed.

  Specifically, when the internal game state is “normal game state” and “small hit B” or “small hit C” is won and the normal game state is maintained, after the small hit game ends, In the “normal C effect mode”, the above-mentioned “gase normal C effect mode (low probability)” is shifted to, while the internal game state is “normal game state” or “latency probability state” and the “2R short open latency probability”. When winning the big hit and shifting to the latent state, after the 2R latent big hit game is over, it is possible to control the transition to the “genuine normal C production mode (high accuracy)” of the “normal C production mode”. It can be set as a simple structure. In this case, regarding the effects under each effect mode, the background effects of both the “genuine normal C effect mode (high accuracy)” and the “gase normal C effect mode (low accuracy)” are the same (for example, In both cases, the background effect reminiscent of the season 'autumn'), while the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is concealed, the “genuine normal C effect mode (high accuracy)” and “ In the “normal C effect mode (low probability)”, the probability of occurrence of a specific effect is made different, and an inferred element as to whether or not it is in a high probability state can be given to the player (for example, the above-mentioned Probability of occurrence of a specific effect ("expected promising effect" that suggests or implies that there is a possibility of a latent state) rather than "genuine normal C effect mode" To increase Below it is). With such a latent expectation effect, it is possible to give a player a sense of latent expectation as to whether or not the current internal game state is a latent state, thereby further enhancing the fun of the game.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24 includes the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20 (at least the change pattern information included in the change pattern designation command (for example, the winning lottery result, the presence / absence of the reach effect, and the special symbol) in the effect mode described above. Based on the fluctuation time, etc.))), a function unit (notice performance appearance control means) for controlling the appearance of various notice effects related to the jackpot lottery result is provided. Such notice effect forms include not only notice effects represented by “reach effects (effect forms related to reach variation patterns)” but also those that occur in association with these effects or independently. These performance modes suggest (notice) the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter referred to as “winning expectation expectation”) of whether or not the winning type has been won, and the player's winning expectation to the winning type ( It functions as a “scoring production” to earn a winning expectation. The winning-winning expectation varies depending on the level of appearance (selection rate) of the performance and the gaming state. For example, the expected winning degree in the reach effect changes mainly according to the appearance rate (selection rate) of the reach effect. Specifically, the expectation of winning a win when one reach production (for example, a strong SP reach) appears is the ratio at which the reach production including a big hit and a loss is executed (all occurrences of the reach production) Rate), it is indicated by the ratio (the rate of appearance of the reach effect at the time of winning) that the reach effect is executed in the case of a big hit. In other words, the winning degree expectation level for the reach production is indicated by “appearance rate of the reach production at the time of winning / total appearance rate of the reach production”. The selection rate for reach production is set. Hereinafter, the notice effect according to the present embodiment will be described.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a reach state (variable display mode with a reach state), and specifically an effect mode in which a final result is derived and displayed via the reach state. This “reach state” means that some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game will generate a big hit (winning win) before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a state that constitutes a part of the display mode to be displayed, in other words, a display mode that indicates the occurrence of jackpot is easy to be derived Is a variable display mode that can be associated with the player. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols indicating the occurrence of a big hit (winning winning) is “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, and “7 (right symbol)”, the decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined hit effective line. Is a part of the display mode indicating that the jackpot is generated (winning winning) (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol indicate “7”, so-called “listening state (reach symbol)) However, a display mode in which the finally derived result does not necessarily indicate the occurrence of jackpot, for example, “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, “7 (right symbol)” is derived. However, a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed (here, a middle symbol that does not form a hearing state (reach symbol)) is stopped, rocked, enlarged, reduced, or deformed continuously for a predetermined period of time. However, in the stage before the final result is displayed, It refers to the state or the state in which the possibility of the occurrence is continuing. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become “big hit”, but the finally derived result is a stop display mode (for example, “7 (Left symbol) "" 7 (middle symbol) "" 7 (right symbol) "), the game result of this time is" lost ".

  The above “reach production” is a notification (improvement) of the jackpot winning expectation degree (which may be a big hit (including the fact that it will be a big hit)) indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not you won the big hit. There are multiple types of reach productions associated with the jackpot winning expectations. For example, when a reach effect with a specific reach state appears, the expectation of winning a big hit is relatively higher than when a reach effect with a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears There is. Such reach production with a specific reach state is referred to as 'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. It should be noted that the “reach production” is dressed like a non-reach production (so-called “normal fluctuation”) that does not go through the reach state in addition to the N reach or SP reach through the reach state, and the final derived result ( Reach effect (sudden hit reach effect) that strikes the player's intention, such as a combination of decorative symbols) is a stop display mode showing a big hit, a predetermined variation time through or without going through the reach state In addition, it is possible to include a premium reach effect (full-reach reach effect) such as performing a variable display while maintaining the display mode showing the big hit and notifying the big hit winning decision. These special reach effects are used as an effect mode for notifying that a big hit is made (a big hit win is confirmed).

  The reach effects of this embodiment are provided with the following types of reach effects. First, reach production can be broadly classified as “N-reach, weak SP reach A, weak SP reach B, strong SP reach A, and strong SP reach B” for “normal A” or “normal B”. "Special reach" type dedicated to "definite change", "reach during probability change" type dedicated to "probability change state", and the like. These reach production types include one or more types of variation patterns. For example, “weak SP reach A type” is “weak SP reach A1 to A3”, “weak SP reach B type” is “weak SP reach B1 to B3”, and “strong SP reach A type” is “strong”. SP Reach A1 to A3 ',' Strong SP Reach B Type 'is' Strong SP Reach B1 to B3', 'Special Reach' Type is' Special Reach 1 to 3 ', and' Probably Reaching Reach 'Type Includes 'probability reach 1-3'.

  The expectation degree for winning a big hit in the reach effect varies mainly depending on the selection rate of the reach effect and the gaming state. For example, between different types of reach, it is related to the big win lottery result so that the expectation of winning a big hit is high due to the relationship of “N reach <weak SP reach A <weak SP reach B <strong SP reach A <strong SP reach B”. And the selection rate (incidence rate) is determined, and among the same kind of reach, the larger the number, such as “weak SP reach A1 <weak SP reach A2 <weak SP reach A3”, the greater the expectation of winning the big hit The selectivity is determined so as to increase. Note that the actual degree of big hit winning expectation varies depending on whether other notice effects are involved. For this reason, for example, even when the weak SP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high expectation level for winning a big hit is involved, the expected degree of winning a big hit can be equal to or higher than the strong SP reach.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
The “pseudo-ream” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. Specifically, in a decorative symbol variation display game, a part or all of a decorative symbol is temporarily stored. By making a temporary stop state (a change stop operation that looks like a stop display appears) and then performing a re-variation display operation of the decorative symbol from the temporary stop state, the display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times. In addition, it means a variation display mode in which the variation display operation as one set is expressed as if it is executed a plurality of times. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later that is developed over a plurality of variable display operations.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, while forming a temporary reach state (a change display state that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state before the temporary stop state, or that the reach symbol appears to stop) Once the temporary stop state is reached with a combination of symbols that are lost, the display is changed again, or a special decorative design (a special decoration that suggests the possibility of the occurrence of pseudo-ream) is used instead of the normal decorative design. It is possible to perform a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). The occurrence rate (probability of occurrence of a pseudo-ream according to the number of pseudo-reams) is mainly determined so that such “pseudo-ream” increases the probability of winning a big hit as the number of pseudo-reams increases. This pseudo-ream is mainly used as a notice effect that expects a reach effect, and the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the winning expectation expectation, that is, the occurrence of an SP reach type with a relatively high expected winning expectation is expected. It can be done.

  Therefore, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on a reach variation pattern with a pseudo effect), the “pseudo-ream” is generated at a stage before a reach state is formed (an earlier stage of reach effect) For example, as a notice that there is a possibility that a reach effect may occur, a combination of symbols (reach symbols) when a part or all of the stopped symbols constituting the combination of symbols in the temporary stop state forms a reach state. A pseudo-variable display operation that suggests that there is a possibility of composition is performed, and after the pseudo-variation is completed, a final game result is derived via the reach state. In the case of a production scenario that does not include a reach production (in the case of a production mode based on a normal variation pattern with pseudo-continuations), the final game result is derived without going through the reach state after the pseudo variation is completed. become. Here, the fluctuation display developed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of going through the reach state, the reach state is formed by the main fluctuation and the final game result is obtained. Is derived. In the case of the production mode accompanied by the pseudo-ream and the reach production, different production modes of “pseudo-run” and “reach production” are combined. In the book, unless there is a special need, the reach production with pseudo-ream is treated in the same way as the “reach production”.

(5-2-3. Button notice effect)
The “button notice effect” refers to an effect mode in which the content of the effect can be changed depending on whether or not the player has operated the frame effect button 13, and the so-called “player participation type” effect mode. Say. In the “button notice effect”, the subsequent effect changes depending on whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated during a predetermined operation reception period. For example, due to the operation of the frame effect button 13, the currently displayed character display changes or a special sound effect is generated. In the “button notice effect”, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit using the change of the effect before and after the operation of the frame effect button 13. Such a “player-participation-type” performance mode can give the player a feeling as if he / she has influenced the game result, so that the fun of the game can be increased.

(5-3. Pre-reading notice effect)
In addition, the effect is that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation holding ball (undigested operation holding ball) that has not been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (the change display operation of the special symbol). There is a pre-reading notice effect that informs the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, “pre-fetching determination” is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result related to the operation-reserved ball (steps S317 to S318 in FIG. 10, steps S337 to S338 in FIG. 11 (random number determination processing to special Stop symbol data creation process))).

  Furthermore, by using the result of the “pre-reading determination”, a “pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern of the special symbol when the operation-pending ball is used for the execution of the symbol variation display game in the future. (Refer to step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11 (start-up winning random number determination process)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, the reach variation pattern for specifying the reach effect via the reach state (reach variation pattern), or the normal variation pattern for designating the non-reach effect that does not pass through the reach state ( It is determined in advance whether the normal variation pattern is obtained. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side includes not only the variation pattern type but also the variation pattern at the start of variation. Also, information on whether it is a “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or a “lack fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a lose is also included. When the information on the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, when the “hold addition command” including the information of the prefetch determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, the prefetch determination included in the command is received. An effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the content of the result is performed. This hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and is composed of data on the upper byte side for designating the number of active hold balls at the time of prefetch determination, and lower byte side data that can specify the contents of the prefetch variation pattern (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the hold addition command includes the operation hold ball information and the prefetch variation pattern information. However, the effect control unit 24 does not necessarily cause the pre-reading notice effect to appear when the hold addition command is received, and determines the execution of the pre-reading notice effect by lottery, at the timing when the operation holding ball is generated, or first At the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game to be performed, or at a predetermined timing during the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball can be displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of variation” obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the change display operation Absent. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “strong SP reach A1” will be representatively described. In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach A1”, but the “strong SP reach A” type, which is the main point. It is possible to specify that the variation pattern (strong SP reach A1 to A3) of the same system “strong SP reach A” is classified as “strong SP reach A type”. In the pre-reading notice effect related to this case, an effect mode related to the pre-read “strong SP reach A type” appears. Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is that there is a possibility that a roaring effect (in this case, a strong SP reach A type) with a high expectation of winning a big hit will occur for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. Information on whether it is high or low, in other words, information on whether the chance of winning a big hit is high or low, and by notifying the player in advance of such information before the action-holding ball is digested In addition to the current symbol variation display game, the interest of the player is improved not only for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also for the fun of the game.

(5-3-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIGS. 5 and 6)
Next, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 5 and 6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and show an example of the prefetching notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is partly in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, below the display area of the decorative symbol). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. : "O (white circle)" shown in the figure) or in an unlit state (no operation hold ball: circle shown by broken line in the figure), information on the current number of operation hold balls is notified (see FIG. 5).

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. (See FIG. 5). Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number. Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a prefetch notice lottery for lottering whether or not the prefetch notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part b2 with hatching in FIG. 5 is applicable). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type among the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and the probability of winning a hit type with a relatively high expectation degree of winning big wins is higher. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons in the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the object of the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, or rainbow. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation degree for winning the big hit, the reserved color having the higher expected degree of winning the big hit is selected with a high probability. It has become. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) makes a special notice effect appear over a plurality of symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”. This continuous notice effect is executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation display operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. The “pre-change notice effect at the start of change” refers to, for example, displaying a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and executing it continuously over a plurality of symbol change display games. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. If the right to execute is temporarily stored, and a pre-reading notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is to be performed, and if this pre-reading notice lottery is won, those symbols will be displayed for all existing reserved memories at that time Make the variable display game an expression with some relevance. For example, in all the symbol variation display games related to the existing operation hold ball from the oldest operation hold ball to the pre-read notification target operation hold ball in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. . In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed by other directing means. For example, a movable object (not shown) is operated in a pre-read-only operation pattern to straddle a plurality of symbol variation display games. It may be configured to be able to appear as a pre-reading effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 2A shows a case where the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect produced by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the expectation of winning a big hit during this symbol change display game, the expectation for the big win is combined with the contents of the look-ahead notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

  It should be noted that various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are manifested by the rendering means arranged in the gaming machine. Any directing means can be employed as the directing means in the present invention as long as it is a stimulus transmitting means that can appeal to human perception such as vision, hearing, and touch. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45, LED device, speaker 46, and liquid crystal display device 36, sound generating device, effect display device, or a vibrating device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, or a movable body having a visual effect An example of such a feature is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. In addition, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is not performed in a specific period (for example, a part or all of the period during which a roaring effect with a relatively high expectation degree for winning a big hit is occurring) , To prevent the frame effect button 13 from being pressed), or to provide special effect means placed in a difficult operation state (for example, making it difficult to press the frame effect button 13), or to vibrate the manual operation means. An exciting device may be provided.

(5-4. About effects during the game: FIGS. 63 to 64)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 64, an effect during each winning game (hereinafter referred to as “winning effect”) will be described.

  As specific control, table number information of the hit effect table in FIG. 64 is stored from the hit effect table selection table in FIG. 63, and each time a command is received, each set in the hit effect table is stored. Production data (production scenario data: parts scenario) corresponding to the round is set.

(T-1. Hit effect table selection table: FIG. 63)
FIG. 63 shows a hit effect table selection table. As shown in the figure, in the hit performance table selection table according to this embodiment, one of the hit performance tables is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of hit performance tables according to the winning type (excluding lose). It has become so. For example, WINTBL-PO, WINTBL-PA, and WINTBL-PB in the hitting performance table are 7 symbols direct hit (16R long open condition with positive variation big hit), 7 symbols other than hits A (16R long and short open condition with positive variable big hit), 7 This is selected for non-symbol B (12R long / short open condition-accurate large hit). In addition, the winning table WINTBL-P1 to WINTBL-P4 and WINTBL-P5 are selected in the case of scenarios BB1 to BB4 (14R long / short open condition with certain variation big hit) and scenario BB5 (14R long / short open non-probable big hit). . The hitting effect tables WINTBL-PC and WINTBL-PD are selected in the case of C per 7 symbols (16R long open condition with certain variation big hit) and D other than 7 symbols (12R long short open with certain variation big hit). Then, WINTBL-P7 of the hitting effect 7 table is selected in the case of 2R short open latent large hit (2R low base probability variable big hit) or small hit. Although not shown, it is also possible to prepare two or more hitting effect tables of the same type for one winning type, and select one hitting effect table at a predetermined ratio.

(T-2. Hit effect table: FIG. 64)
FIG. 64 shows the contents of the hit performance table selected based on the hit performance table selection table described above. In the hit performance table, there are a plurality of types of hit performance tables WINTBL-PO, WINTBL-PA, WINTBL-PB, WINTBL-P1 to WINTBL-P5, WINTBL-PC, WINTBL-PD, and WINTBL- P7 is included, and an effect scenario (a hit effect scenario) for an effect content (a hit effect) that should appear as the winning game progresses is defined.

  Here, a round game is followed by an INT between rounds. From the viewpoint of the one round game, an inter-round INT is placed on the front side of the one round game, and an inter-round INT is also placed on the rear side. Will be placed. Focusing on this point, one unit of “round cycle game” (hereinafter referred to as “cycle game”) is a sum of 1 “round game” followed by “inter-round INT”. This cycle game is repeated as many times as the number of cycles corresponding to the specified number of rounds, and it can be understood that a hit effect scenario is given to this.

  Here, for each production scenario (part scenario) that constitutes the hit production scenario, consider the start and end of when and when to end it. In this case, the normal method is to match the start and end of the production scenario (part scenario) with the start or end of the cycle game, that is, the start of the round game. That is, when the round start command is received, the production scenario (part scenario) is started or ended.

  However, it is not always necessary to strictly follow this rule. An effect scenario (part scenario) may be started or ended when a round end command is received between the start and end of the cycle game. In other words, since the “end of round game” occurs in the middle of the 1-cycle game period (1R round game + round INT), the end of this round game should be the start or end point of the production scenario (part scenario) Can do. Apart from the regularity of repetition of the cycle game, for example, the production scenario is started from “end of round game” belonging to one round cycle, and “start or end of cycle game” belonging to the first cycle or a plurality of cycles thereafter The production scenario can be terminated with “ As a specific example, there is a case of a production part scenario “failure → to the second time” of the big hit game production scenario of scenario BB3 of FIG. Here, when considering a cycle game, a production scenario “failure → second” is started from the middle of the third cycle (end of the 3R round game), and the end of the next fourth cycle (4R The effect scenario is terminated at the end of the inter-round INT after the round game. Therefore, from the middle of the 3rd cycle to the end of the 4th cycle (hereinafter, the form in which the interval between rounds is placed before and after the 1 round game is referred to as “1.5 cycles”), “failure → go to the 2nd” The production of.

  The hit performances are mainly the opening effect at the start of the big hit (hereinafter abbreviated as “OP effect”), the round effect over the 1.5-cycle cycle game, the round effect over the multi-cycle game of 2 cycles or more ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “integrated round effect”), and an ending effect after the end of the final round game (hereinafter abbreviated as “ED effect”). The hit-challenge production scenario is composed of partial scenarios for these components as part scenarios. The hit effect of the present embodiment is a so-called “story-style” effect that has story characteristics through an OP effect to an ED effect. Here, a “battle (battle) effect” is used in which the hero and the enemy character battle each other and give the player the pleasure of guessing the type of jackpot according to the battle result.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a round effect over a 1.5-cycle cycle game, the start or end of the effect does not necessarily correspond to the start or end of the cycle game and may be shifted. For convenience of explanation, this correspondence shift is ignored in FIG. 64 and the explanation thereof.

(A hit table: WINTBL-P0)
Referring to FIG. 64, the winning effect table “WINTBL-P0” is selected when winning 7 symbols directly (16R long open condition with certainty big hit). When the hit effect table “WINTBL-P0” is selected, first, in the “OP effect”, a “battle start effect” for notifying that the battle effect is started appears as an effect at the start of the big hit game. The

  In the integrated round production related to the 1R to 3R cycle games, in accordance with the parts scenario of “Big hit production 1”, until the main character wins after the main character and enemy characters fight as “big hit production 1” The production appears. In at least one of the “OP effect” during the jackpot start interval and the 1R of the jackpot effect 1, instruction information for prompting the right big winning opening 50 (for example, “right-handed” characters) A display and a display indicating that the right big prize winning opening 50 is opened: the hit position launch position guidance effect) are also notified. Thereby, the player can know that the right big prize opening 50 side is opened. In addition, the current round is displayed sequentially in the upper right corner of the screen, and each time the round is switched, the current round is switched and displayed (this stage is the first to third rounds). Round is displayed). In addition, the number of game balls being acquired during the current round or the number of game balls acquired up to the current round is based on the payout of one winning ball or the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls as a unit. The integrated value of the number of payouts is also displayed. Also, in a predetermined gaming state other than the normal gaming state, in this embodiment, in the state where there is an electric support (in the probability variation state or in the short-time state), the big hit (conditional probability variation big hit / non-conditional) that can be counted again as a big hit villa. The number of consecutive villas in the case where the number of consecutive villas is incremented by 1 by a later-described villa counter is also displayed.

  Subsequently, the 4R cycle game is a V-opening round (special round). When a V prize is generated (game ball enters the V prize opening) in the 4R, the transition to the “probable change state” is confirmed. It will be. For this reason, in the round effect related to the 4R cycle game (a winning effect scenario for the V-opening round), a “probability GET effect” for notifying that the V prize has been won appears based on the occurrence of the V prize. . This probability variation GET effect appears when a “V winning command (transmitted in step S569)” described later is received.

  In addition, in the round effect related to the 4R cycle game, the V prize is given to the player as an effect mode (the V open round effect) that appears until the V prize is generated while the V attacker is in the open state. When a “V winning winning notification effect (for example, a display effect such as“ Aim for V winning! ”) Is displayed to encourage entry into the mouth, and a V winning is generated, "Direction" appears. In other words, the V winning achievable notification effect is a chance effect (probable GET chance effect) suggesting that a “probable GET effect” can be acquired. In FIG. 64, “probability change GET (probability change GET effect)” is abbreviated to include the probability change GET chance effect and the probability change GET effect.

  Here, as described above, the “V winning” is controlled under the condition that a V winning opening (not shown) provided in the large winning opening 50 or on the right side of the center decoration 48 is opened. (In the present embodiment, a V winning opening is provided in the big winning opening 50), it means that the winning ball that has entered the big winning opening 50 enters this V winning opening, and there is a condition such as direct contact with 7 symbols. If it is a promising big hit, a V winning opening is opened in a V open round (special round: 4R, 8R, 12R, etc.), and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one or more) wins a physical game. In general, it is configured to win V with a probability of 100%. In the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the V winning opening in the V opening round, the V attacker is closed immediately. During the V opening round, the subsequent entering into the V winning opening is blocked. It has become so. To be precise, even when the V attacker is short-opened, a game ball may enter the V prize opening with a very low probability. This is also the case (steps S566 to S56 in FIG. 22 described later). (See S569). In addition, once a V winning is generated, the right to acquire a certain change due to the V winning is suspended, and the right will not be accumulated no matter how many times V winning is made during this big hit game (the end of this big win). Thus, the V passing flag is turned off (see S597 in FIG. 24). For this reason, in the current big hit game, if a V prize occurs and a “probable GET effect” appears even once, even if a V prize occurs again thereafter, the V prize will be given. The production is not displayed (the same applies to the “V prize production” described later). As a result, the probability change GET effect will only appear once during the jackpot game period, and if the player wins the V prize multiple times even if multiple V prizes occur during this jackpot game This prevents misunderstandings and does not give distrust to gaming machines.

  Subsequently, in the integrated round production related to the 5th to 6th cycle games, according to the part scenario of the “partner selection production”, the partner who becomes the player who fights with the main character, for example, two characters fighting A “partner selection effect” for selecting one appears.

  Subsequently, in the integrated round production related to the 7th to 16th cycle games, in accordance with the parts scenario of “big hit production 2”, for example, after hitting the main character and the enemy character and winning big hit as “big hit production 2” The hero victory directing appears.

  Then, when the big hit end interval after the end of the last round game is entered, the ED effect appears according to the parts scenario of the ED effect.

(Hitchu production table: WINTBL-PA)
Referring to FIG. 64, the winning effect table “WINTBL-PA” is selected when winning A (16R long / short open condition-acceptable big hit) other than 7 symbols. As in the case of the hit effect table “WINTBL-P0”, when the hit effect table “WINTBL-PA” is selected, the battle start effect is first displayed in the “OP effect”, and the 1R to 3R eyes. "Big hit effect 1" appears in the integrated round effect related to the cycle game of the game, "Variable GET effect that notifies the V winning command received in the V opening round related to the 4R cycle game, and that V winning was announced" Appears. However, unlike the case of the win-winning effect table “WINTBL-P0”, in the integrated round effect related to the 5R to 10R cycle games, the same type of effect as the above-mentioned jackpot effect 2 according to the parts scenario of “hit effect 3” However, “big hit effect 3” different from the big hit effect 2 described above appears.

  Then, as a peculiar point that is a feature of the present invention, an “ED effect” appears according to the part scenario of the ED effect over the 11R-16R cycle game and the jackpot end interval. That is, the “ED effect” starts from the 11R cycle game, which is a time point before the time when the jackpot end interval arrives, until the final 16R cycle game and over the jackpot end interval. It is a scenario that continues to flow. If it does in this way, as an advantage, it will become unnecessary to prepare the connection effect to the big hit end interval in each cycle game of 11R-16R, for example, the round effect corresponding to each.

(During hitting table: WINTBL-PB)
Referring to FIG. 64, the hitting effect table “WINTBL-PB” is selected when winning B (12R long / short open condition probability variation big hit) other than 7 symbols is won. The effect contents of this hit effect table “WINTBL-PB” are the same as in the case of hits other than 7 symbols A (16R long / short open condition probability variation big hit), except that it is shortened by two rounds. Since the end of the jackpot game period is shortened by two rounds, the “ED effect” appears for the ED effect between the 11th to 12th cycle games and the jackpot end interval. For this reason, there is no need to prepare a connection effect up to the big hit end interval in each of the 11R to 12R cycle games.

(A hit table: WINTBL-P1)
Referring to FIG. 64, the hitting effect table “WINTBL-P1” is selected when the scenario BB1 (14R long / short open condition-accepted big hit) is won. When the hit effect table “WINTBL-P1” is selected, first, in the “OP effect”, the “battle start effect” for notifying that the battle effect has been started as an effect at the start of the big hit game, Will not appear. That is, the big hit start interval time here is set to the shortest time of the main control side interruption period (for example, 4 ms, or an integral multiple of 20 ms), and since this shortest time is not visible to the player, The upper “OP effect” does not appear, and the player seems to start from the first round of the effect, that is, the battle effect starts immediately. In other words, the jackpot start interval time in the scenarios BB1 to BB5 is an integer multiple of the main control-side interrupt period as long as it is in the range of seconds in which the effect of appearing to have started from the production of the first round is obtained. Can be set to any value within the range of seconds. In the case of the big hit (C per 7 symbols, D per other than 7 symbols), which will be described later, the big hit end interval time can be substantially eliminated based on the same concept. In other words, if the big hit end interval time when the big hit hits a long game with a right-hand hit is within the range of the number of seconds in which the effect that the big hit hits a long game, that is, the battle effect seems to continue, can be obtained. It can be set to any value within a range of seconds that is an integral multiple of the insertion period.

  In this way, when trying to obtain a form in which the jackpot start INT and jackpot end INT are omitted, the values of the jackpot start interval time and jackpot end interval time are set to a very short time width that is not visible to the player (the shortest in the program). Time), the jackpot start INT and jackpot end INT are substantially eliminated (for example, “the minimum number of seconds in software” in FIGS. 52 and 57). If literally the big hit start INT or the big hit end INT is omitted, there is a possibility that problems such as an increase in program capacity or bugs may occur by adding branch processing by the program at that time. The start INT and the big hit end INT are left as they are, and the value of the interval time is made small without changing the program. For example, the shortest time of the main control side interruption period as the big hit start interval time or the big hit end interval time (for example, By setting 4 ms, or the number of seconds up to 20 ms, which is an integer multiple thereof, the jackpot start INT and jackpot end INT are substantially omitted. This method makes it easier to develop and design models when designing new models (for example, when developing new specifications, there is no significant program change (compatibility between old and new models)). ), And it is advantageous to omit the big hit start INT and the big hit end INT depending on the type of hit. Further, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the program from increasing in the dark clouds, and it is possible to contribute to reducing the control burden of the game operation.

  In the integrated round production related to the 1R-3R cycle games, a “battle production” is developed in which the main character and the enemy character fight against each other in accordance with the part scenario of “first successful challenge production”. In this battle effect, whether or not the hero wins the enemy character can obtain the right to win the V prize, in other words, whether or not the current big hit is a big hit in which the V open round occurs. Can be notified. Here, as the “first challenge production” to challenge the V prize game aiming for the V prize, the hero won the enemy character and gained the right to win the V prize in advance. "Direction (Victory Direction)" appears. Thereby, the player can know that the V-opening round occurs after the next round, that is, that the V winning prize is obtained (the current jackpot is the jackpot where the V-opening round occurs). .

  In scenario BB1, the 4th and 8th Rs are V-open rounds (see scenario BB1 in FIG. 39). For example, in the round effect related to the 4R cycle game, part of the V-open round effect As a result, a V-winning achievable notification effect such as “Aim for V-winning!” Or the like is urged to prompt the player to enter the V-winning (prompt to enter the V-winning entrance). In other words, the V winning achievable notification effect here is a chance effect that suggests that a “V winning effect” described later can be acquired. In FIG. 64, “V winning (V winning effect)” is abbreviated to be displayed including the V winning achievable notification effect and the V winning effect.

  Subsequently, the 4R round is a V opening round, and in the round production related to the 4R cycle game, the V winning prize is followed according to the scenario of the “V winning presentation” (here, the V opening round, Since it has been described that the winning is surely generated), a “V winning effect” for notifying that the gaming state after the big hit game will be changed to the next certainty change state will appear. Since this “V winning effect” is an effect mode that occurs based on the V winning, it is an effect mode that suggests the same meaning as the content of the probability variation GET effect. Further, until the V prize is generated, the “Aim for V prize!” V-winning-possible notification effect is continuously displayed. When the V-winning occurs, the “V-winning effect” is displayed. It is like that. In addition, as another specification, multiple types of scenario battle bonuses with different numbers of rounds of long open big hits are prepared. You may make it alert | report definitely that it was elected by classification.

  Subsequently, in the integrated round effect related to the 5R to 10R cycle games, the “hit effect 2” appears according to the part scenario of the jackpot effect 2. As for the ED effect, the “ED effect” appears during the 11th to 14th cycle games and the jackpot end interval. For this reason, it is not necessary to prepare a connection effect up to the big hit end interval in each cycle game of 11R to 14R.

(During hit table: WINTBL-P2)
Referring to FIG. 64, the hitting effect table “WINTBL-P2” is selected when the scenario BB2 (14R long / short open condition-accepted big hit) is won. When this hitting effect table “WINTBL-P2” is selected, the big hit start interval time is set to the shortest time in the program (for example, 20 ms which is 5 times the interrupt period 4 ms), and the “OP effect” appears in effect. Not.

  In the integrated round effect related to the 1R-3rd cycle games, a battle effect is developed in which the hero and the enemy character fight against each other according to the part scenario of “first challenge challenge failure”. Here, as the “first challenge production” to challenge the V prize game aiming for the V prize, the main character is defeated by the enemy character (for example, the production mode imitating that the main character is attacked by the enemy), and the V prize is awarded. A “Challenge production first failure production (defeat production)” appears in advance to notify that the acquisition right has not been obtained.

  Here, in the 1R-3R cycle game, “Challenge Production 1st Failure” occurs, and the corresponding “Challenge Production 1st Failure Production” occurs because the V game in the next round game (here, 4R) Although the attacker opens and closes (see the scenario BB2 column in FIG. 39), the time is very short (short open (open time 0.1 s): see 4R in FIG. 45). In the 4th R, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 50, and even if a winning ball enters the big winning opening 50, the V-attacker is controlled to a short opening operation. This is because V winning is impossible. In the hit stage tables “WINTBL-P3” to “WINTBL-P5” of scenario BB3 to scenario BB5 to be described below, the reason why the defeat effect appears, that is, the reason why the V winning game fails or the “Challenge effect Xth” The reason why “failure production” appears is the same as this.

  Subsequently, in the round effect related to the 4R cycle game, a transition effect “directed to the second time” to challenge the second V winning game appears according to the part scenario. As the contents of the “directing to the second time”, for example, the hero in the 1R-3R cycle game defeated the enemy character (challenge the first time failure), but the hero challenges the enemy character again. This is the content that imitates the situation.

  Subsequently, in the integrated round effect of the 5th to 7R, a battle effect is developed in which the main character and the enemy character fight against each other in accordance with the part scenario of “successful second challenge effect”. Here, as the “challenge production second time” to challenge the V prize game aiming for the V prize, the “challenge production second success production” in which the hero again challenges the enemy character and wins appears. The second successful production of the challenge production is a production mode that suggests the same meaning as the content of the “first successful production of the challenge production” already described. Then, it can be known that the V release round occurs at the 8th R).

  Subsequently, the 8R round is a V open round, and in the round production related to the 8R cycle game, a V prize winning notification effect appears, and according to the “V prize production” part scenario based on winning the V prize. Then, a “V winning effect” is displayed to notify that it is determined that the game state after the big hit game will be the next certain change state. This is the same as the generation process of the V winning effect in scenario BB1.

  Subsequently, in the integrated round effect related to the 9th to 11th cycle games, “big hit effect 2” appears according to the part scenario of big hit effect 2. As for the ED effect, the “ED effect” appears in the 12th to 14th cycle games and the jackpot end interval. For this reason, there is no need to prepare a connection effect up to the big hit end interval in the 12R-14R cycle game.

(A hit table: WINTBL-P3)
Referring to FIG. 64, the winning performance table “WINTBL-P3” is selected when scenario BB3 (14R long / short open condition-accepted big hit) is won. In this hit performance table “WINTBL-P3”, the output from the big hit start interval and the round game of 1R to 4R is the same as that in the hit hit performance table “WINTBL-P2”, and the big hit start interval time is set in the program. The shortest time (for example, 20 ms, which is five times the interrupt period of 4 ms), and the “OP effect” is practically not displayed. And in the 1st to 3R integrated round effects, a “challenge effect first failure effect” appears. In addition, in the 4R round effect, a transition effect “Directed to the 2nd time” for challenging the second V winning game appears.

  Then, in the integrated round effect relating to the 5R to 7R cycle games, a battle effect is developed in which the main character and the enemy character fight against each other in accordance with the part scenario of “Challenge effect second failure”. Here, as the “Challenge production second time” to challenge the V prize game aiming for V prize, the hero tries again to fight the enemy character, but defeat (for example, the hero imitates the enemy attack again) As a result, a “Challenge production second failure production” is announced to notify in advance that the V winning prize right has not been obtained.

  Subsequently, in the round effect related to the 8R cycle game, a transition effect “Direction to the third time” to challenge the third V prize winning game appears according to the parts scenario. The content of the “production for the third time” is substantially the same content as the content of the “production for the second time” (the production content imitating that the main character challenges the enemy character again).

  Then, in the integrated round effect related to the 9th to 11th cycle games, a battle effect is developed in which the hero and the enemy character fight against each other in accordance with the part scenario of “3rd successful challenge effect”. Here, as the “challenge production third time” to challenge the V prize game aiming at the V prize, a “challenge production third success production” in which the main character challenges the enemy character and barely wins appears. This challenge production third successful production is a production mode that suggests the same meaning as the contents of “Challenge production first successful production” or “Challenge production second successful production” already explained. The player can know that a V-opening round will occur in the next round (here, 12R).

  Subsequently, the 12th round is a V-opening round, and in the round production related to the 12th round of the cycle game, the game state after the jackpot game is the next probable change state according to the part scenario of the “V prize production” based on winning the V prize. A “V winning effect” is announced to notify that it will be confirmed. This is the same as the generation process of the V winning effect in scenario BB1 and scenario BB2.

  Subsequently, an “ED effect” appears over the 13R-14R cycle game and the jackpot end interval. For this reason, in the cycle game of 13R-14R, it is not necessary to prepare the connection effect until the big hit end interval.

(During the performance table: WINTBL-P4)
Referring to FIG. 64, the hitting effect table “WINTBL-P4” is selected when the scenario BB4 (14R long / short open condition-accepted big hit) is won. The big hit start interval and the production up to the 1R-8R cycle game in the hit performance table “WINTBL-P4” are the same as those in the hit performance table “WINTBL-P3”. The jackpot start interval time is set to the shortest time on the program (for example, 20 ms which is five times the interrupt period of 4 ms), and the “OP effect” is not displayed. In the integrated round production related to the 1R-3R cycle game, the “Challenge production 1st → failure” production is the round production related to the 4R cycle game, and the “2nd production” cycle is the 5R-7th cycle. In the integrated round production related to the game, the “Challenge production second time → failure” production appears, and in the round production related to the 8R cycle game, the “failure → third time” production appears.

  However, in the integrated round effect relating to the 9R to 11R cycle games, a battle effect is developed in which the main character and the enemy character fight against each other in accordance with the part scenario of the “challenge effect 3rd time → failure” effect. Here, as the “Challenge production third time” to challenge the V prize game aiming for V prize, the hero tries again to fight the enemy character, but is defeated (in this case, for example, imitating the hero's abuse) The “Challenge production third failure production” appears in advance to notify that the right to win the V prize has not been obtained. When this “Challenge Production 3rd Failure Production” appears, it would suggest that there is a high possibility of a non-probable big hit, and the player could not get a V prize in this big hit. You will be discouraged by guessing it is likely.

  However, since the 12R round game per scenario BB4 is a V open round, the round production related to the 12R cycle game is the “Challenge 3rd failure production stage” developed in the 9R-11R cycle game. As a staging scenario from "", a "revival effect" appears that imitates the rise of the hero who starts the 12th R but recovers his consciousness.

  This “revival effect” is different from the round effect related to the 4R cycle game in scenario BB1 and the effect mode itself, but the meaning of the effect is substantially the same. That is, while the V attacker is in the open state, the “V winning acquisition notification effect” appears as an effect mode that appears until the V winning occurs, and the player is thus informed that the V attacker has been released. When the V winning is generated, the “V winning effect” appears as in the other scenarios BB. The difference between this hit stage presentation table “WINTBL-P4” and the hit stage presentation table “WINTBL-P3” is that, in the hit stage presentation table “WINTBL-P3”, a V-opening round occurs in the previous stage scenario related to the cycle game. In contrast to being notified in advance, in the hit effect table “WINTBL-P4”, an effect suggesting that the V-opening round does not occur once appears in the effect scenario related to the previous cycle game. In the production scenario relating to the next cycle game, it is informed that the V-opening round has occurred, and the “V-winning production” is produced on the condition that the V-winning is achieved. Appears to notify that the current big hit is a promising big hit.

  Subsequently, an “ED effect” appears over the 13R-14R cycle game and the jackpot end interval. For this reason, in the cycle game of 13R-14R, it is not necessary to prepare the connection effect until the big hit end interval.

(During the performance table: WINTBL-P5)
Referring to FIG. 64, the winning performance table “WINTBL-P5” is selected when scenario BB5 (14R long / short open uncertain large hit) is won. The jackpot start interval in the hit effect table “WINTBL-P5” and the effects from 1R to 11R in the cycle game are the same as those in the hit effect table “WINTBL-P4”, and the jackpot start interval time on the program The shortest time (for example, 20 ms, which is five times the interrupt period of 4 ms), and the “OP effect” is not displayed. In addition, it is configured so that no V prize is generated throughout the entire round. In the integrated round production related to the 1R-3rd cycle games, the “Challenge production 1st → failure” production is in the 4R round production and the “failure → 2nd” production is in the 5R-7th cycle game. In the integrated round production, the “Challenge production 2nd → failure” production is in the 8R round production, “Failure → Go to the 3rd” production is the integrated round production in the 9th to 11R cycle games, and the “Challenge production 3” “Round → Fail” effect, and a round effect related to the 12th cycle game, an “end effect” is suggested that suggests that the jackpot is shifted to a probabilistic state due to a non-probable big hit.

  Here, in the 9R to 11R cycle games, the “Challenge Production 3rd Failure” occurs, and the corresponding “Challenge Production 3rd → Failure” production occurs, as described above, although the V attacker opens and closes. (Refer to the column of scenario BB5 in FIG. 39), because the short opening (short opening (opening time 0.1 s): see the 4R in FIG. 48) that time is very short, the game ball in the big winning opening 50 This is because it is extremely rare that a player has entered a ball, and even if a winning ball enters the large winning opening 50, the V-attacker is controlled to a short opening operation, so that V winning is virtually impossible.

  Subsequently, an “ED effect” appears over the 13R-14R cycle game and the jackpot end interval. For this reason, in the cycle game of 13R-14R, it is not necessary to prepare the connection effect until the big hit end interval.

(Hitchu production table: WINTBL-PC)
Referring to FIG. 64, the hitting effect table “WINTBL-PC” is selected when C wins for 7 symbols (16R long open condition-acceptable big hit) in the winning lottery of FIG. The big hit start interval in the hit stage effect table “WINTBL-PC” and the effects up to the cycle game of 1R to 15R are the same as those in the hit stage effect table “WINTBL-P0”. "Director" appears, "Big hit effect 1" appears in the integrated round effect related to the 1R-3R cycle game, the VR round becomes V open in the 4th R, V win occurs, the 4R cycle “Probability GET production” that informs you that you have won V in the V-opening round related to the game appears, followed by “Partner selection production” in the integrated round production related to the 5th to 6th cycle games. In the round effect related to the 7th to 15th cycle games, “Big Hit Effect 2” appears.

  However, unlike the win-winning effect table “WINTBL-P0”, in the win-winning effect table “WINTBL-PC”, immediately after entering the 16R cycle game (final cycle game) before the big hit end interval, In accordance with the parts scenario of “ED production”, “immediate challenge production” appears as “ED production”. That is, the “ED effect” starts from the 16R cycle game that is the time point before the time when the big hit end interval arrives, and continues until the big hit end interval after the end of the 16R cycle game. And then washed away. Therefore, in the 16R cycle game, there is no need to prepare a connection effect up to the big hit end interval.

  The jackpot end interval time here is set to the shortest time of the main control side interruption period (for example, 4 ms, or the number of seconds up to 20 ms which is an integral multiple thereof). The “ED effect” does not appear, and the player seems to have finished without the jackpot end interval, that is, the instant attack effect that continues from the round game period seems to continue. This is common in the case of the big hit (C per 7 symbols, D per other than 7 symbols) in the special figure 2, and the big hit end interval time when the big hit is extended by right-handed hits. The effect that the battle effect seems to continue is obtained. Therefore, as long as it is in the range of the number of seconds in which such an effect can be obtained, it can be set to an arbitrary value within the range of the number of seconds that is an integral multiple of the main control side interruption period.

(Hitchu production table: WINTBL-PD)
Referring to FIG. 64, the hitting effect table “WINTBL-PD” is selected when winning D (12R long / short open condition-acceptable big hit) other than 7 symbols in the winning lottery of FIG. It is similar to the case of the hitting effect table “WINTBL-PA”, and even when the hitting effect table “WINTBL-PD” is selected, the battle start effect appears first with the “OP effect” and the 1R -"Big jackpot effect 1" appears in the integrated round production related to the 3R cycle game, the V open round occurs in the 4R, and a V win occurs, and the V win occurs in the V open round related to the 4R cycle game A “probable GET effect” is displayed to notify the user of the fact. However, unlike the win-winning effect table “WINTBL-PA”, the “big hit effect 3” appears in the integrated round effect related to the 5R to 8R cycle games. The jackpot end interval time here is also set to the shortest time (for example, 4 ms, or the number of seconds up to 20 ms which is an integer multiple thereof) on the program (main control side interrupt cycle).

  And as a peculiar point that is a feature of the present invention, an “immediate challenge effect” as an “ED effect” appears in accordance with the ED effect parts scenario over the 9R to 12R cycle games and the jackpot end interval. Therefore, in the 9R-12R cycle game, there is no need to prepare a connection effect up to the big hit end interval.

(Hitchu production 7 table: WINTBL-P7)
When winning 2R short open latent big hit (2R low base probability variation big hit) or small hit, “WINTBL-P7” in the hit effect table is selected. The hit effect produced by the hit effect table is a dedicated effect mode different from the “battle effect” described above. The contents inform that the game state after the big hit game may become a latent state if paying attention to the game state, and inform that the transition to the secret effect mode if paying attention to the effect mode. Is. In other words, it is a “latent probability transition expectation effect” informing that there is a possibility of winning the 2R low base probability variation big hit (giving the expectation of winning). Therefore, when the 2R low base probability variation big hit or small win is won, both the operation modes during the winning game are controlled in the same or very similar operation mode, and the same effect mode is also made to appear in the hit performance. Furthermore, by shifting the effect mode after the winning game to the concealed effect mode, the gaming state after the winning game can be made a secret state, and the player can be expected to have a latent state. Yes.

(5-4-1.7 Direct effect during direct hitting of symbols: Fig. 41)
7-spot direct hit (16R full open) during the special symbol fluctuation display game immediately before the big win, the pre-notification of the probable change big hit confirmation, the effect during the big hit game when winning the "7-spot direct hit" Yes, an effect scenario selected in WINTBL-P0 in FIG. 64 is associated. The “OP effect” is performed during the jackpot start INT (10 seconds or more), and the “hit ED effect” is performed during the jackpot end INT (18 seconds or more). Therefore, it acts as the first big hit.

  By the way, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit game related to “big hit belonging to the first group” in which a long open round game is repeatedly executed up to a specified number of rounds among a plurality of hit types, the specified round number ends. An ED effect is performed at a later jackpot end interval, thereby ending the jackpot game (see FIG. 41). However, in the case of a big hit game related to “big hit belonging to the second group” in which a long open round game is executed a plurality of times and then a short open round game is repeatedly executed up to the specified number of rounds, ED effect is performed from the beginning or end of the first short-opening round game of the game, and this means that the substantial jackpot game has ended, that is, the round game with substantial play has ended. The person is notified (see FIGS. 42 to 50).

  When this relationship is expressed using the concept of cycle games, in the case of one “big hit belonging to the first group”, in the period of the big hit end INT following the last cycle game that is the end cycle of the specified number of rounds, The ED effect is performed, and the big hit game and the effect are finished (see FIG. 41). On the other hand, in the case of the “big hit belonging to the second group”, the first cycle of the short open round cycle game sequence starting from the cycle one or more cycles before the end of the specified number of rounds An ED effect is performed from the beginning of the game or from the beginning or end of the round game belonging to the first cycle game, thereby informing the substantial end of the big hit game (see FIGS. 42 to 50).

  Therefore, in the case of the “big hit belonging to the second group” as described above, the player recognizes that the big hit has ended before the arrival of the big hit end interval, exactly from the time when the short open round game starts to repeat. It will be. In the case of the “big hit belonging to the second group” described above, after receiving the command (round start command or round end command) that triggered the start of the ED effect, the main control unit side thereafter Even when the transmitted round start command, round end command, and jackpot end command are received, the effect control side ignores all of these commands (invalidation processing) and continues to play the ED effect.

  The hit effect during 7 symbol direct hits (16R full open) relates to the jackpot belonging to the first group of the former, and as shown in FIG. 41, “hit hit end INT (18 ED effect is performed corresponding to the period of “seconds or more)”. For the remaining round cycle games that are not related to the OP effect and the ED effect, a predetermined game that continues over one cycle or two or more cycle games according to the WINTBL_P0 effect scenario selected in the hit effect table in FIG. (For example, jackpot effect 1, probability change GET chance effect (V winning achievable notification effect), probability change GET effect, battle partner selection effect, jackpot effect 2, etc.) are performed. In FIGS. 41 to 43 and FIGS. 49 to 50, “probability GET effect” is abbreviated to include the probability change GET chance effect and the probability change GET effect.

  More specifically, the hit effect in the direct contact with 7 symbols is a battle effect, and when the maximum opening time of the round game that becomes the boundary for switching the parts effect scenario is described in chronological order, 1R-3R is long. Opening 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is long opening 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 5R-6R is long opening 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 7R-16R is long opening 'Maximum 29.8 seconds' All of 1R to 16R have an operation pattern of long open “maximum 29.8 seconds”. As for INT between rounds, INT after round game of 4R, 8R and 12R is 3 seconds, INT after round game of 16R is 1.98 seconds, round after other round games The interval INT is 2 seconds.

  Then, the “OP effect” appears in the first big hit start interval, and the “big hit effect 1” effect appears in the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R cycle game. The chance production (probability GET chance production) that suggests that “probability GET production” can be acquired in the period of the cycle game (V open round), and “probability GET production” that informs that V has won () Here, it is described that the V prize is surely generated in the first V-opening round (the same applies to the following)) “Battle partner selection effect” appears in the 5R-6R cycle game period, and 7R “Big hit effect 2” appears in the period of the first to 16th cycle games, and “ED effect” appears in the subsequent big hit end INT period.

  For effects other than the jackpot start INT and the jackpot end INT, that is, for the cycle game period of the round game (effects other than the OP effect and the ED effect), the cycle game period of one or a plurality of cycles is straddled according to the effect scenario of the hit effect table. Even if a round start command or a round end command is received during the cycle game period, these commands are treated as invalid (invalidation process), and the effects that flow during the cycle game period Does not affect. This relationship is not only “at least one hit type” per 7 symbols, but also A per other than 7 symbols, B per other than 7 symbols, scenario BB1 to BB5, C per 7 symbols, D per other than 7 symbols. This also applies to the jackpot type belonging to the other second group.

(5-4-2.7 effect other than the design A during the hit effect: FIG. 42)
The hit performance during hitting with a hit A other than 7 symbols (16R long and short open condition probability variation big hit) relates to the “big hit belonging to the second group” described above, and starts from the 11th R and continues until the 16th R as shown in FIG. The ED effect is started from the beginning (at the start of the round) of the first 11R cycle game in the continuous short-cycle game. For the remaining round cycle games that are not related to the OP effect and ED effect, according to the WINTBL_PA effect scenario selected in the hit effect table in FIG. Winning effects (for example, jackpot effect 1, probability change GET chance effect, probability change GET effect, jackpot effect 3 etc.) are performed.

  More specifically, the hit effect at the hit A other than the 7 symbols is also a battle effect, and the opening times of the round games that become the boundaries for switching the parts scenario are described in chronological order, 1R to 3R are long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 5R-10R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 11R-16R is short open 'Maximum 0.1 seconds' It is an operation pattern. As for INT between rounds, INT after round game of 4R, 8R and 12R is 3 seconds, INT after round game of 16R is 1.98 seconds, round after other round games The interval INT is 2 seconds.

  Then, the “OP effect” appears in the first big hit start interval (10 seconds or more), and the “big hit effect 1” effect appears in the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R cycle game. The chance production (probability GET chance production) suggesting that “probability GET production” can be acquired in the period of the 4th cycle game (V opening round), and the “probability GET production” informing that V has been won. ”Appeared and“ big hit production 3 ”appeared in the 5R-10R cycle game period, the short open cycle game period of 11R-16R and the subsequent big hit end INT (5 seconds or more) The “ED production” has come out over the period. Therefore, it acts as the second big hit.

  If a round start command or round end command is received later during a cycle game period other than the jackpot start INT and jackpot end INT, that is, these commands are ignored (invalidated processing) It does not affect the production that flows during the period.

  In the case of A other than 7 symbols, as a singular point common to other B symbols other than 7 symbols and scenarios BB1 to 5 etc., during the period of executing a long open round game a plurality of times in a big hit game, a round start command or Execute the predetermined effect (parts scenario) of the big hit effect using the round end command as an opportunity to start the production, and when the first short open round game of the short open round game is started, the predetermined effect ends. Instead, the ending production starts.

  Therefore, in the case of A other than 7 symbols, the start point at which the “ED effect” appears as a singular point common to other B symbols other than 7 symbols and scenarios BB1 to 5 is higher than the start point of the big hit end interval. Therefore, the hit A other than the 7 symbols also acts as the second jackpot. In the case of FIG. 42, round games in each of the 11R to 16R cycle games are performed in a short release operation pattern. For these short release round cycle games, a connection effect up to the jackpot end interval is prepared. I don't do it. As soon as the last 10R cycle game related to the long release round game ends, the “ED effect” appears from the beginning of the 11R cycle game related to the short release round game until the jackpot end interval. This is because there is no need to prepare a directing connection.

(5-4-3.7 effect other than symbols per hit B: Fig. 43)
The hitting effect by hitting B other than 7 symbols (probable big hit with 12R long and short opening condition) is also related to the latter “big hit belonging to the second group” as described above. As shown in FIG. ED effects are performed from the beginning of the first 11R cycle game in the continuous short-cycle game. For the remaining round cycle games that are not related to the OP effect and the ED effect, a predetermined hit effect that continues over one or more rounds according to the WINTBL_PB effect scenario selected in the hit effect table in FIG. (For example, jackpot effect 1, probability change GET chance effect, probability change GET effect, jackpot effect 3, etc.) are performed.

  The difference from non-7 symbols per A is that in the case of non-7 symbols per B, the total number of rounds is 12R, and the 11th to 12th rounds are short-open cycle games, and the 12th round is the final. Since this corresponds to the cycle game, the INT between rounds is 1.9 seconds of the remaining ball discharge time, and the rest is the same as A per other than 7 symbols.

(5-4-4. Performance during hit by scenario BB1: FIG. 44)
The hitting performance by scenario BB1 (14R long opening condition-acceptable big hit) is also related to the latter “big hit belonging to the second group” as described above. As shown in FIG. 44, the short start from 11R to 14R ED effects are performed from the beginning of the first 11R cycle game in a series of open round cycle games. For the remaining round cycle games that are not related to the big hit start INT and the big hit end INT, according to the effect scenario of WINTBL_P1 selected in the hit effect table in FIG. Predetermined hit effect (for example, challenge effect 1st time → success effect, V opening round effect (V winning achievable notification effect), V winning effect (appears on the condition of entering the V winning opening), jackpot effect 2) is performed. 44 to 46, the V opening round effect and the V winning effect are abbreviated as “V winning effect”.

  More specifically, the hit effect in scenario BB1 is a battle effect, and when opening times of round games serving as boundaries for switching the parts scenario are described in chronological order, 1R to 3R are long open 'maximum 29 .8 seconds ", 4R eyes are long open" up to 29.8 seconds ", 5R-10R are long open" up to 29.8 seconds ", 11R-14R are short open (11R-12R are short open" max 0 .1 second ', 13R is short opening' maximum 0.08 second ', 14R is short opening' maximum 0.1 second '). As for INT between rounds, INT between rounds after the 4R, 8R, and 12R round games is 3 seconds, INT between rounds after the 14th round game is 1.98 seconds, and INT between other rounds is 2 Seconds.

  In FIG. 44, the “OP effect” is shown to exist for the first big hit start INT, but this “OP effect” does not actually appear. This is because the duration of the jackpot start interval is set to the shortest time in the program (4 ms or a multiple thereof, here 20 ms), and the jackpot start INT does not substantially exist. This point is the same for scenario BB1 to scenario BB5 in FIGS. During the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R round game, the “Challenge 1st → Success” effect appears, and from the 3R round game end to the 5R cycle game end. A “V open round effect (V winning acquisition notification effect)” suggesting that “V winning effect” can be acquired in a period, and a “V winning effect” notifying that a V winning has appeared, “Big hit effect 2” appears in the period from the beginning of the cycle game to the end of the cycle game of the 10th R, and “ED effect” in the period from the start of the 11R cycle game to the end of the big game through the 14R cycle game "Appears.

  It should be noted that the time point when the “ED effect” appears is before the start point of the big hit end interval, and therefore acts as the second big hit. This is a singular point common to A except for 7 symbols, B for other than 7 symbols, Scenarios BB1 to BB5, C for 7 symbols, and D for other than 7 symbols, except in the case of 7 symbols. In the case of the example of FIG. 44, each round game in the cycle game of 11R to 14R is performed with the operation pattern of short release 'maximum 0.1 seconds'. For the round game cycle game period, there is no preparation and execution of connection effects up to the jackpot end interval. As soon as the 10R cycle game, which is the last round game with the long release 'maximum 29.8 seconds' action pattern, is completed, at the beginning of the 11R cycle game related to the short release round game, “ED This is because the “production” appears. Even if a round start command or a round end command is received or a jackpot end command later while the “ED effect” is flowing, these are all ignored and do not act as an effect start trigger command. For this reason, for example, even when a round start command or a jackpot end command is received, the corresponding round start effect (open effect) or ending effect is not executed.

(5-4-5. Production during hit by scenario BB2: Fig. 45)
The hitting performance by scenario BB2 (14R long opening condition probability variation big hit) is also related to the “big hit belonging to the second group” as described above. As shown in FIG. 45, the short opening round starts from the 12th R and continues to the 14th R ED effects are performed from the beginning of the first 12R cycle game in the series of cycle games. For the remaining round cycle games that are not related to the OP effect (actually not appearing) and the ED effect, one or more rounds according to the effect scenario of WINTBL_P2 selected in the hit effect table in FIG. A predetermined effect (for example, challenge effect 1st time → failure, failure → second time, challenge effect 2nd time → success, V opening round effect, V winning effect, jackpot effect 2 and the like) is performed.

  In this scenario BB2, the difference from scenario BB1 is that the opening time of the round game of the 4R is not “maximum 29.8 seconds” for long opening, but “maximum 0.1 seconds” for short opening. There is. When the opening time of the round game in scenario BB2 is described in time series by dividing it by the production period, 1R to 3R are long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is short open 'maximum 0.1 seconds', 5R ~ 7R is long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 8R is long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 9R-11R is long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 12R-14R short open (12R is (Short-release 'maximum 0.1 seconds', 13th R is short-release 'maximum 0.08 seconds', 14R is short-release 'maximum 0.1 seconds'). Regarding the duration of INT between rounds, INT between rounds after the 4R, 8R and 12R round games is 3 seconds, INT between rounds after the 14th round game is 1.98 seconds, and between other rounds INT is 2 seconds.

  The “OP effect” at the first big hit start interval (4 ms or a multiple thereof, 20 ms in this case) does not actually appear, and is the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R round game. “Challenge production 1st time → failure” production appears and during the period from the end of the 3R round game to the end of the 4R cycle game, the “failure → 2nd” production appears and the 5R cycle In the period from the beginning of the game to the end of the round game of the 7R, the production of “Challenge 2nd → Success” appears, and in the period from the end of the 7R round game to the end of the 8R cycle game, A V-opening round effect that suggests that a “V-winning effect” can be obtained, and a “V-winning effect” that informs that a V-winning event has been made appear from the beginning of the 9R cycle game. “Big jackpot effect 2” appears in the period until the end of the eye cycle game, and “ED” in the period from the beginning of the 12R cycle game to the end of the jackpot INT (11 seconds or more) through the 14R cycle game "Direction" appears.

  Also in this scenario BB2, as the singular point common to other scenarios BB and the like, the start time point at which the “ED effect” appears is before the start point of the jackpot end interval in time series. Acts as a big hit of 2. In the case of the example in FIG. 45, when the last 11R cycle game related to the round game of the long release operation is completed, the “ED effect” is immediately displayed from the beginning of the 12R cycle game related to the round game of the short release operation. Let it come out. In each cycle game of 12R to 14R, a round game is performed in a short release operation pattern, so that a round start command and a round end command are received at the beginning and end of each short release round game, and then a jackpot end command is received. However, these are all ignored and do not act as a production start trigger command. For this reason, for example, even when a round start command or a jackpot end command is received, the corresponding round start effect (open effect) or ending effect is not executed. Therefore, by making the “ED effect” appear from the beginning of the 12R cycle game at an early stage, it is not necessary to prepare and execute a dedicated effect for each of the 12R to 14R cycle games individually or as a whole. The advantage is obtained.

(5-4-6. Production during hit by scenario BB3: Fig. 46)
The hitting performance by scenario BB3 (14R long opening condition-accepted big hit) is also related to the “big hit belonging to the second group” as described above. As shown in FIG. 46, the short opening round that starts from the 13th R and continues to the 14th R ED effects are performed from the beginning of the first 13R cycle game in the continuous cycle game. For the remaining round cycle games that are not related to the OP effect (actually not appearing) and the ED effect, one or more rounds are performed according to the effect scenario of WINTBL_P3 selected in the hit effect table in FIG. For a certain number of consecutive hits in the cycle game (for example, challenge production 1st → failure, failure → 2nd, challenge production 2nd → failure, failure → 3rd, challenge production 3rd → success, for V opening round Production, V prize production etc.) are performed.

  In this scenario BB3, unlike the scenario BB2, not only the 4th R but also the 8R round game has a short opening time of “maximum 0.1 seconds”. When the release time of the round game in scenario BB3 is described in time series by dividing it by the production period, 1R to 3R are long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is short open 'maximum 0.1 seconds', 5R ~ 7R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 8R is short open 'Maximum 0.1 seconds', 9R-11R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 12R is long open 'Maximum 29.8' , 13R to 14R are short-open (13R short-open 'maximum 0.08 seconds', 14R short-open 'maximum 0.1 seconds'). As for INT between rounds, INT between rounds after the 4R, 8R, and 12R round games is 3 seconds, INT between rounds after the 14th round game is 1.98 seconds, and INT between other rounds is 2 Seconds.

  The “OP effect” at the first big hit start interval (4 ms or a multiple thereof, 20 ms in this case) does not actually appear, and is the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R round game. “Challenge production 1st time → failure” production appears and during the period from the end of the 3R round game to the end of the 4R cycle game, the “failure → 2nd” production appears and the 5R cycle In the period from the beginning of the game to the end of the 7R round game, a “Challenge 2nd → Failure” effect appears, and in the period from the 7R round game end to the 8R cycle game end → "To the 3rd" effect appears, and during the period from the beginning of the 9R cycle game to the end of the 11R round game, the "Challenge 3rd → Success" effect appears, and the 11R The V opening round effect suggesting that the “V winning effect” can be obtained in the period from the end of the game to the end of the 12th cycle game, and the “V winning effect” notifying that the V winning is announced. “ED effect” appears in the period from the beginning of the 13R cycle game to the end of the jackpot end INT (13 seconds or more) through the 14R cycle game.

  Also in this scenario BB3, as a singular point common to other scenarios BB and the like, the start point where the “ED effect” appears is before the start point of the jackpot end interval in time series, and therefore Acts as a big hit of 2. In the case of the example in FIG. 46, the round game in each of the 13R to 14R cycle games is performed in the short release operation pattern, but the performance corresponding to each short open round is not prepared and executed. When the last 12R cycle game related to the round game of the long release operation is completed, the “ED effect” is made to appear immediately from the beginning of the 13R cycle game. For this reason, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to prepare and execute a dedicated effect individually or as a whole for each of the cycle games 13R to 14R.

(5-4-7. Production during hit by scenario BB4: Fig. 47)
The hitting effect by scenario BB4 (14R long opening condition-accurate big hit) is also related to the above-mentioned "big hit belonging to the second group". As shown in FIG. Compared to, the direction of the 9R to 11R cycle games has changed from “3rd challenge production success” to “3rd challenge production failure” and the 12R cycle game production is “For V Open Round” The only difference is that it is changed from “Reproduction” (abbreviated as “V prize production” in FIGS. 44 to 46) to “Restoration → V prize production”. Others are hit by scenario BB3 It is the same as the production. Therefore, the description is omitted.

(5-4-8. Winning performance by scenario BB5: Fig. 48)
The hitting performance by scenario BB5 (14R long / short open uncertain big hit) is also related to the above-mentioned “big hit belonging to the second group”. As shown in FIG. 48, the short open round starting from 13R to 14R ED effects are performed from the beginning of the first 13R cycle game in a continuous cycle game. For the remaining round (1R to 12R) cycle games that are not related to the OP effect (substantially does not appear) and the ED effect, according to the effect scenario of WINTBL_P5 selected in the hit effect table in FIG. A certain hit-and-play effect that continues over one or more rounds of the game (for example, challenge production 1st → failure, failure → 2nd, challenge production 2nd → failure, failure → 3rd, challenge production 3rd → failure , An end effect, etc.) are performed.

  In this scenario BB5, the opening times of the 4R, 8R, and 12R round games are “maximum 0.1 seconds” with a short opening. When the opening time of the round game in scenario BB5 is described in time series by dividing it by the production period, 1R to 3R are long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is short open 'maximum 0.1 seconds', 5R ~ 7R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 8R is short open 'Maximum 0.1 seconds', 9R-11R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 12R-14th is short open (12R eyes) Are short-opening 'maximum 0.1 seconds', the 13th R is short-release 'maximum 0.08 seconds', and 14R is short-release 'maximum 0.1 seconds'). As for INT between rounds, INT between rounds after the 4R, 8R, and 12R round games is 3 seconds, INT between rounds after the 14th round game is 1.98 seconds, and INT between other rounds is 2 Seconds.

  The “OP effect” at the first big hit start interval (4 ms or a multiple thereof, 20 ms in this case) does not actually appear, and is the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R round game. “Challenge production 1st time → failure” production appears and during the period from the end of the 3R round game to the end of the 4R cycle game, the “failure → 2nd” production appears and the 5R cycle In the period from the beginning of the game to the end of the 7R round game, a “Challenge 2nd → Failure” effect appears, and in the period from the 7R round game end to the 8R cycle game end → "To the 3rd" appears, and during the period from the beginning of the 9R cycle game to the end of the 11R round game, the "Challenge 3rd → Failure" effect appears, and the 11R During the period from the end of the end game to the end of the 12R cycle game, an effect of “end effect” appears, and the jackpot end INT (11 seconds or more) passes from the start end of the 13R cycle game to the 14R cycle game. “ED production” appears in the period until the end.

  That is, in the case of scenario BB5 which is a non-probable big hit, the 11R round game, which is the last round of the long release operation, is finished, and the cycle game related to the 12R-14R round game of the short release operation is entered. However, the “ED effect” does not occur immediately. The “ED effect” is made to appear from the beginning of the 13R cycle game in the middle of the cycle game (12R to 14R) of the short opening operation. However, as soon as the cycle game related to the 12R-14R short open round game starts, an end effect is generated immediately, and when the end effect ends, an ED effect is started in the following form. In the sense of recognizing that the big hit has ended, it is substantially equivalent to the start of the ED effect with the start of the cycle game related to the short open round game of 12R to 14R.

  Also in this scenario BB5, as a singular point common to other scenarios BB and the like, the start point at which the “ED effect” appears is before the start point of the jackpot end interval in time series, and therefore Acts as a big hit of 2. In the case of the example in FIG. 48, the round game in each of the 13R-14R cycle games is performed in the short release operation pattern, but it is not possible to prepare and execute the effects corresponding to the cycle games of these short open rounds. Not. For this reason, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to prepare and execute a dedicated effect individually or as a whole for each of the cycle games 13R to 14R.

(5-4-9.7 Production during C hit per symbol: Fig. 49)
The effect during hit with C per 7 symbols (16R long opening condition-acceptable big hit) relates to the above-mentioned “big hit belonging to the second group”, and as shown in FIG. 49, it starts from 1R and continues to 16R. The ED effect is started from the beginning of the last 16R cycle game in a series of open round cycle games. For the remaining round (1R to 15R) cycle games that are not related to the OP effect and the ED effect, the cycle of one or a plurality of rounds is performed according to the WINTBL_PC effect scenario selected in the hit effect table in FIG. Predetermined hitting effects (for example, jackpot effect 1, probability variation GET chance effect, battle partner selection effect, jackpot effect 2 etc.) are performed continuously over the game.

  More specifically, the hit effect at C per 7 symbols is also a battle effect. If the opening time of the round game that becomes the boundary for switching the part scenario is divided by the effect period and described in time series, 1R ~ 3R is long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is long open' maximum 29.8 seconds', 5R-6R is long open 'maximum 29.8 seconds', 7R-15R is long open' maximum 29. The operation pattern of 8 seconds' and 16R is long release 'maximum 29.8 seconds', and all of 1R to 16R are long release' maximum 29.8 seconds'. As for the INT between rounds, the INT between rounds after the 4R, 8R, and 12R round games is 3 seconds, and the INT between other rounds is 2 seconds.

  Then, the “OP effect” appears in the first big hit start interval (10 seconds or more), and the “big hit effect 1” effect appears in the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R cycle game. “Probability GET production” is announced during the 4R cycle game period (V open round), and “Variation GET production” is announced to announce that V has been won. Periods of the 5R-6R cycle game "Battle partner selection effect" appears, "Big jackpot effect 2" appears during the 7R-15R cycle game period, the big hit end INT (4ms or multiples here, from the beginning of the 16R cycle game) The “ED effect” appears over the period until 20 ms) ends. Therefore, in the case of a winning A other than the 7 symbols related to the drawing of the special figure 1, the “ED effect” is flown from the 11R-th cycle game, and the big hit end INT is not omitted, whereas the drawing of the special figure 2 In the case of C per 7 symbols, the “ED effect” is played from the 16R cycle game, and the big hit end INT is substantially omitted because the set time is set to the shortest time in the program. Is different. Therefore, it is possible to end the big hit effect with the immediate attack challenge effect that appears as the ED effect for the last round game, and to maintain the tension that the player is in a row.

  Also in the case of C per 7 symbols, the start time point at which the “ED effect” appears is before the start point of the end interval in time series, and thus acts as the second big hit. Even if a round end command or jackpot end command is received later during the period when this “ED effect” is being played, these commands are only ignored (invalidated), and during the cycle game period It does not affect the production (ED production) that flows in This means that it is not necessary to prepare and execute a dedicated effect (connection effect up to the jackpot end interval) for the 16R cycle game, and that the jackpot end INT period can be omitted. means.

(5-4-10.7 effect during D hits other than symbols: Fig. 50)
The effect during hitting by hitting D (12R long and short open condition probability variation big hit) other than 7 symbols relates to the “big hit belonging to the second group” described above, and starts from 5R and continues to 12R as shown in FIG. The ED effect is started from the beginning of the 9R cycle game in the middle of the short open round cycle game. For the remaining round (1R to 8R) cycle games that are not related to the OP effect (10 seconds or more) and the ED effect, one or more according to the effect scenario of WINTBL_PD selected in the hit-challenge effect table in FIG. A predetermined hit effect (for example, jackpot effect 1, probability change GET chance effect, probability change GET effect, jackpot effect 3 etc.) is performed continuously over the round of the game.

  More specifically, the hit effect for D other than 7 symbols is also a battle effect, and the opening times of round games serving as boundaries for switching the effect (part scenario) during the big hit are described in chronological order. 1R-3R is long open 'Maximum 29.8 seconds', 4R is long open' Maximum 29.8 seconds', 5R-8R is short open 'Maximum 0.1 seconds', 9R-12R is short open' Maximum The operation pattern is 0.1 seconds'. Further, the INT between rounds after the 4R and 8R round games is 3 seconds, and the INT between other rounds is 2 seconds.

  Then, the “OP effect” appears in the first big hit start interval (10 seconds or more), and the “big hit effect 1” effect appears in the period from the beginning of the 1R cycle game to the end of the 3R cycle game. Probability GET chance production that suggests that “probability GET production” can be acquired in the 4R cycle game period (V open round), and “big hit production” in the 5R-8R cycle game period. "3" appears, and "ED effect" appears over the period until the end of the big hit end INT (4 ms or a multiple thereof, 20 ms in this case) after the 9R-12R short-open cycle game period It is like that. In the case of D other than 7 symbols related to the lottery of the special figure 2, the “ED effect” is played from the 9R short opening cycle game, and the big hit end INT is set to the shortest time in the program. Is substantially omitted. Therefore, it is possible to end the big hit effect with the immediate attack challenge effect that appears as the ED effect for the last round game, and to maintain the tension that the player is in a row.

  In the case of D other than 7 symbols, the start point at which the “ED effect” appears as a singular point common to other B symbols other than 7 symbols and scenarios BB1 to 5 is higher than the start point of the big hit end interval. It is ahead in time sequence and therefore acts as the second jackpot. In the case of FIG. 50, the “ED effect” appears from the beginning of the 9R cycle game in the middle of the continuous short-open round game. If a round start command or a round end command is received later during the 9R to 12R short-open cycle game period and the subsequent jackpot end INT period, these commands are ignored (invalidation processing). Thus, the effect (ED effect) flowing during the cycle game period is not affected. That is, preparation and execution of the connection effect up to the big hit end interval is not performed for the cycle game of each short opening round of 9R to 12R.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 16>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7-16, the game operation | movement process in the main-control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to the interrupt disabled state, sets to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes the register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step S012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the production control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. The production mode is set to the normal production mode.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary, a random number counter for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH (“XXH” means any hexadecimal number)) when the power is shut down, and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup flag = 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. A game restoration process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015). In the game recovery process, predetermined information for game recovery is acquired from the backup information, and various effect control commands including the information (hereinafter, various effects transmitted from the main control unit 20 when the game operation is recovered). The control command is abbreviated as “power recovery command”) to the effect control unit 24 to notify the effect control unit 24 of the game progress state when the power is cut off.

  In the above power recovery command, a “return display command (BA03H)” that designates an effect that reports power recovery (execution start is designated), and the number of special FIG. Special figure 1 operation hold ball number designation command (B4XXH: XXH is a value corresponding to the number of operation hold balls) "special figure 2 operation hold ball number at power-off" “Specification command (B5XXH)”, “Return variation pattern assignment designation number command” for designating the fluctuation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) at the time of power shutoff, Waiting for a customer at power shutoff (No operation holding ball state: described later) If there is a special symbol variation start process (see step S402 in FIG. 12: YES route), there are a plurality of types of effect control commands such as a “demo display command” for specifying this. The production control unit 24 grasps the processing state when the power is shut off based on the contents of these production control commands, and returns the production operation return processing (for example, the production mode is returned to the production mode when the power is cut off). To do).

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state, and thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thereby, it is monitored for each interrupt whether or not a winning is detected (a winning has occurred) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter provided corresponding to each winning opening and counting the number of game balls (winning balls) won.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variation display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or an auxiliary per-determination random number is updated (+1 for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). In this error management process, an abnormality in the gaming operation state is monitored, and when an abnormality (error) occurs, a predetermined error process is performed.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this winning ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls is issued as a payout control board (payout) Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the occurrence of a general electric opening game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, a setting process necessary to execute and control the hit game corresponding to the win is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high-base gaming state in which “electric support is present” occurs, right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (normal symbol start port) 37 is performed to display a “launch position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)” that informs 37 of the instruction information for prompting a prize)). This right-handed information is reported in a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where there is electric support, and in the state where there is electric support. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34, or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in the right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” for instructing the start of the launch position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives the command. The launch position guidance effect is controlled to appear.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (winning game start information, symbol variation display game start / end information, winning occurrence information, winning ball payout information, etc.) is transmitted through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. Output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302).

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, when the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing relating to the special symbol variable display operation in steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, the special symbol change display operation is not performed when either the small hit game or the big hit game is being performed. As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H or 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306), the special symbol variation processing (step S307), and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described later.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S062) of FIG. 8, and the special symbol variation display and stop display on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, a pre-start process (special process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1) is performed. As the winning process on the side of FIG. 1, processing for adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure side caused by the occurrence of winning at the upper start port 34, processing for storing various random numbers, processing for creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed. The special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9), which will be described later, also serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting port check process. As the pre-start process for executing the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 side winning process), the special pending figure 2 side operation pending ball number addition process caused by the occurrence of winning at the lower start opening 35, various random numbers Storage processing, creation processing of a pending addition command, and the like are performed, and the same processing procedure as the special figure 1 starting port check processing described below is performed.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 to be described later. (S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). In the reserved storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are stored in a special symbol. Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit that generates a random number by hardware (a jackpot determination random number counter for counting the jackpot determination random value: not shown). This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. This count value is stored as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for special jackpot determination random values in RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer) provided separately from the reserved storage area of RAM 203, The CPU 201 reads out and uses the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the hold addition command is prohibited by the process of step S315). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side in the gaming state with the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that, when placed under the “electric support state”, the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved over the normal gaming state “high base gaming state (movable wing piece 47 of Activating rate improvement state: The winning probability per assistance is 255/256, and the opening extension function is activated) ”, so that when the player aims the launch position to win the normal symbol start opening 37 ( In this embodiment, when the aim is such that the game ball passes through the right flow down path 3c), the number of the operation reservation balls according to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 operation reservation ball") is frequently Presumed to occur. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electric support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (the winning probability per assist is 1/256, and the open extension function is not activated. In this embodiment, the game ball is hardly guided or guided to the upper start opening 34 side due to a falling direction changing member such as a game nail. When aiming at the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side, the game is such that it is particularly disadvantageous. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  The second reason is a problem of technical intervention. As an example of the problem of technical intervention, if only some pre-reading notice effect (especially a pre-fetching notice effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit) has occurred, Is recognized, the special symbol variation display game 2 which is the priority variation side is continuously executed without interrupting the special symbol 2 operation holding ball, and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) It will be possible to continue the game while receiving the maximum benefits of the jackpot lottery. In the present embodiment, “12R length opening probability variation big hit” and “16R length opening probability variation big hit” or “16R length opening condition positive variation big hit”, which are more profitable, are received than the special symbol 1 side symbol lottery. It is designed to win with high probability (details will be described later). For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Using this, if it is clear that the special figure 1 operation holding ball has won the big hit, after receiving the maximum benefit of the special symbol 2 side big hit lottery until the end of the power support state, The problem of technical intervention, such as digesting the special figure 1 operation holding ball and easily obtaining a big hit, causes inequalities among players.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above problems, a section (prefetch prohibition state) for prohibiting the prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is provided, and these sections are switched according to the gaming state. It is configured to be controllable.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S319) is not performed and the processing proceeds to step S320. .

  If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then a random number determination process is performed (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the ‘prefetch determination’ process. Here, the ‘prefetch determination is determined’ is performed in advance to determine the “winning lottery” related to the currently held ball. Specifically, the lottery result (variation start) of “random number determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination (see S409 in FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variable display operation. The winning lottery result) is determined in advance.

  Upon entering the random number determination process in step S317, first, a jackpot determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is obtained, and then a special figure 1 random number determination table described later is stored. get. Then, based on the obtained jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, a winning determination (another determination of big hit, small hit, and loss) for the current operation holding ball is performed.

(T-1. Per random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “random figure determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 and a “random figure determination table for special figure 2” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2. (Not shown) ".

  In these winning random number determination tables, the winning type (whether big hit, small hit or lost) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Are determined in association with a jackpot determination random number value (the size of the jackpot determination random number: 65536). Specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is any of the determination values. Either big hit, small hit, or loss is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on the situation, the winning type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other. The jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7, which is about 10 times higher than that in the high probability state. The winning probability is about 1/200 regardless of the jackpot lottery probability state. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state.

  If this winning lottery (pre-fetch winning determination) results in a “big hit” winning, the big hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “ The big hit is not won (the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state). If the “small hit” win is selected, the small hit determination flag is set to “5AH (the small hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “small hit non-win (small) The hit determination flag is in the OFF state). Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  In addition, in the winning lottery by the special symbol variation display game 2 (step S337 during the special figure 2 start opening check process (see FIG. 11)), a lottery using the “special figure 2 random number determination table” provided separately is performed. Is called. In the special random number determination table for special figure 2 of the present embodiment, the determination area for the big win is the same (the winning probability for the big win is the same), but the determination value itself for the small win is not defined. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object.

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation processing is performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' processing, and here, 'prefetching symbol determination' is performed in which the “symbol lottery” related to the current operation holding ball is determined in advance. Specifically, the lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation process (see S410 of FIG. 11 to be described later)” executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation. ) Is prefetched. The random number determination process (step S317) to the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318) is a process related to the “prefetching determination”.

  When entering the special stop symbol data creation process of step S318, first, the winning lottery result obtained by the random number determination process of step S317 is acquired, and the symbol table corresponding to this winning lottery result (aside from big hit, small hit and lost) (A big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table, which will be described later, is selected). Then, the random number value for determining the special symbol acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for determining the special symbol, the pre-reading symbol determination for the current operation holding ball (winning (winning)) Type prefetch determination).

(T-2. Symbol table)
In each of the symbol tables described above, a “special symbol determination random value (size of special symbol determination random value: 200)” and a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the random number value for special symbol determination belongs to.

  The above “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type). Data for identifying whether winning is B for other than 7 symbols, scenario BB1 to scenario BB5, C for 7 symbols, D for other than 7 symbols, 2R short open latency big hit, small hits, or loses A to B is there. This special symbol determination data is processing that requires winning type information (for example, processing related to game state transition preparation processing in step S411 of FIG. (This is the data used in the special electric equipment management process (step S060) in Fig. 6.) The "special stop symbol number" designates the special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. This data is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side.

(T-2-1. Big hit symbol table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a “big hit symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “big hit symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. Is included. In each jackpot symbol table, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value (decision value 0 to 199) for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number is determined. One big hit is determined from among a plurality of types of big hits depending on which judgment value the numerical value belongs to.

  In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 0 to 3, the “16R long release condition probability variation big hit (7 symbols direct hit)” wins (symbol selection rate: 4/200), if it falls within the range of judgment values 4 to 13, "16R long / short open condition with probability variation big hit (7 other than 7 symbols)" wins (symbol selection rate: 10/200), judgment values 14 to 23 If it falls within the range of "12R long and short open condition probability variation big hit (B other than 7 symbols B)" wins (symbol selection rate: 10/200), if it belongs to the range of judgment value 24-37 "14R long and short open “Conditional probability variation big hit (scenario BB1)” wins (symbol selection rate: 14/200), and if it falls within the range of determination values 38 to 51, “14R long and short open condition conditional variation big hit (scenario BB2)” wins (Symbol selection rate: 14/200), if it falls within the range of determination values 52 to 65, “14R long / short open condition probability variation big hit (scenario BB3)” wins (symbol selection rate: 14/200), determination value 66 If it belongs to the range of ~ 99, "14R long and short open condition with probability change big hit (scenario BB4)" wins (symbol selection rate: 34/200), if it belongs to the range of judgment value 100 to 191 "14R long and short open uncertain change" “Big Bonus (Scenario BB5)” wins (symbol selection rate: 92/200), and when it falls within the range of judgment values 192 to 199, “2R short open latency big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 8/200), The big hit type is determined by a predetermined symbol selection rate (big hit probability in FIG. 38), and special symbol judgment data and special stop symbol number corresponding to this are determined.

  The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the random number for special symbol determination falls within the range of determination values 0 to 169, “16R long open condition with probability variation big hit (C per 7 symbols)” wins (symbol selection rate: 170/200) When the value falls within the range of the judgment values 170 to 199, “12R long release condition with probability variation big hit (7 other than 7 symbols D)” wins (design selection rate: 30/200), and “2R short open latency big hit” The configuration is such that there is no determination value for winning. That is, there is a higher probability that a type of jackpot with a relatively higher profit will be selected in the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 2 than with the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 1 (in the jackpot symbol table 2, about 2000 balls will be played) The winning probability of C per 7 symbols is determined to be relatively high, and there is no determination value that “2R short open latency big hit” is won (2R short open latency big hit is not a big hit lottery target) In this way, the game is more advantageous to the player who receives the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. .

(T-2-2. Small hits design table)
The small bonus symbol table of the present embodiment is used for both the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2, and the random symbol value for special symbol determination is any one as in the configuration of the big bonus symbol table. Depending on whether or not it belongs to the determination area (determination value), the small hit type (any of small hits A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the corresponding special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number Is to be decided. In addition, the symbol selection rate of the small hits A to C can be set freely.

(T-2-3. Lost design table)
In the lost symbol table of the present embodiment, the “lost symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 relating to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the “lost symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 are included. And are included.

  The lost symbol tables 1 and 2 are classified according to whether the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. (Lose A or Loss B) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and special symbol determination data and special stop symbol numbers corresponding thereto are determined. Note that the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost symbols A to B. Therefore, even if the random numbers for special symbol determination are the same value, the lost symbol table 1 is referred to. The case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred may be different from the case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred to. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of Loss B is set lower than the winning probability of Loss A.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. The start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Prefetching variation pattern determination' is performed to prefetch the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the operation holding ball. Specifically, the result of the “special symbol variation pattern creation process (see S412 of FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the currently activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation (the variation pattern content at the beginning of variation) ) Is prefetched.

  Upon entering the start opening winning random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, the random number for the variation pattern, Is used to determine the look-ahead of the variation pattern at the start of variation, and based on the determination result, the winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used to create the “hold addition command” described later is used. Perform the creation process. The contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) are designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting port winning random number determination process.

  When the start-port winning random number determination process in step S319 is completed, a “hold addition command” is created (step S320) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S321). As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process (step S302) of FIG. 11 is performed.

  The hold addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH” (for example, B6H to B9H is special) is created according to the number of reserved balls and special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). ) Corresponds to the number of the balls 1 for holding the action of the symbol 1 and BBH to BEH correspond to the numbers of the balls 1 to 4 for the special symbol 2 respectively)))) It is composed of lower-order bytes created by processing (the second byte (EVENT) “XXH (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command)” and corresponding to the contents of the prefetch variation pattern). Therefore, this pending addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S315 to S317) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, information that can specify a prefetch variation pattern. However, when the lower byte ((EVENT)) value is a specific value (for example, “01H”), prefetch prohibition is designated.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to appear to indicate that a winning has been made at the start opening, regardless of whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is displayed. it can.

  In addition, even when a new winning is made when the number of active balls is 4 or more, a holding addition command at the time of overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted. Since the “OF hold addition command” is an overflow action hold ball, it is not used for the pre-reading determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”. However, the following effects appear. Can be configured.

  For example, when the production control unit 24 receives the above-described OF hold addition command, if there is a “big hit (may include a small win)” among the current operation hold balls, this is indicated. You may comprise so that the notice effect to alert | report (notice effect on hold at the time of OF prize winning) can appear. In this case, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 stores the prefetch determination information storage means for storing the prefetch determination information included therein, and when receiving the OF hold addition command, If there is a thing that becomes a “big hit (may include a small win)”, the fact that there is a possibility of a big hit is notified (you may decide whether to notify by a predetermined notification lottery) And an on-hold notice effect means. In addition, when the result of the currently running symbol fluctuation display game is “big hit (may include small hits)”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation when OF winning) can be displayed. You may comprise. In this case, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that there is a possibility that the game result related to the current symbol variation is “big hit (may include small hits)” (predetermined It may be determined whether or not to notify by a notification lottery). The notice effect by such an OF hold addition command is similar to the winning effect that appears when the overflow prize is generated, but the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived is prefetched. It plays the same role as the pre-reading notice in terms of notification.

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing content as the above-described special figure 1 start opening check processing (step S301) will be described by omitting as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  When the processing proceeds to step S334, various random numbers (a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a variation pattern random number) used in the special symbol variation display game 2 relating to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball generated this time are displayed. The current value of the random number counter is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a “game state with no electric support” state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or in the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is in the “normal game state” or “latent state”, it is placed under the “no electric support” state, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, when the player targets the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side in the state without the electric support, the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the left flow path 3b. This is a gameability that is disadvantageous for the player, such that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is significantly lower than the case where the above is determined. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no prefetch determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side according to the gaming state. In particular, a configuration in which no prefetch determination is performed in the CZ may be employed.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. However, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and random number determination processing is performed (step S337). In this random number determination process, “prefetching winning determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the random number determination process in step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check process of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S337 is completed, special stop symbol data creation processing is then performed (step S338). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “prefetch symbol determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 during the special figure 1 start port check process of FIG.

  Next, the starting port winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 starting port checking process is performed (step S339), and a holding addition command is created based on the winning command data and the number of pending action balls (step S340). The pending addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S341), and the special figure 2 starting port check process is exited.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is to be preferentially used for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Change order" is determined. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation reservation balls of both the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number and the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of “no operation reservation ball” Become. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is waiting and there is no hold storage state, and the demonstration control screen 24 is informed that the state has entered this state. Switch to display control. Therefore, if “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H)”. This “standby (00H)” is an operation status indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. When the determination process of step 417 is passed for the first time, the special symbol operation status is “standby (01H)” (see step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 15A described later). In the case of “standby (01H)”, the process proceeds to step 418, the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418), and the effect control is performed. As a command, a “demo display command” for displaying the demo screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. If the effect control unit 24 does not receive an effect control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the demonstration display command, the variation display operation is not performed for a certain period of time. It is assumed that a state (standby waiting state) has occurred, and the liquid crystal display device 36 performs “demonstration screen display” to notify that the game standby state is in progress.

  If the number of special figure 1 action hold balls or the number of special figure 2 action hold balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of the special symbol for the action hold ball for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the processing for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of processing is the same, so unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the action holding on the special symbol 1 side The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  If it progresses to step S403, 1 will subtract the number of operation reservation balls (the number of operation reservation balls concerning the special symbol side used for the present variable display operation -1: step S403), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the fluctuation pattern random number) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. ) And stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage areas (hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area) corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) ) Is stored in the storage area corresponding to “n−1” (step S406), and the storage area 4 is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). The “remaining short time number command” is used when the remaining time short number information is notified on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. In this example, the “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change” is performed for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Since the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11), it is omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication. To explain.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This winning random number determination table is the same as the winning random number determination table used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10 and step S337 in FIG. 11). Next, the big hit determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery of big hit, small hit, and loss based on the big hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table is performed.

  If this winning lottery results in a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5AH”, and if it belongs to other determination values, the “big hit non-winning” is set. In addition, when the “small hit” win is made, the small hit determination flag is “5AH”, and when it belongs to other determination values, the “small hit non-win” is set. Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The result of the winning decision this time is 'lost'.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is the same as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “symbol lottery” is performed. Here, the “design lottery” is performed in the “determination at the start of change” for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. The basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10 and step S338 in FIG. 11). .

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained by the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409 are acquired, and based on these As the symbol table corresponding to the current variation display side, one of the big hit symbol tables 1 and 2, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table 1 and 2 is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. To determine the winning type related to the special symbol variation display game this time.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating a game state after a winning game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the variation pattern allocation designation number (current gaming state), the winning lottery result obtained in the random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process, Then, using a random number for variation pattern, etc., the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation is determined by lottery. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern, a “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern is created as an effect control command, and this is controlled by the effect control. Transmit to the unit 24 side. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'look-ahead determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 10) S319 to S320, and processes similar to those in steps S339 to S340 in FIG. 11, but here, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation, that is, A variation pattern at the start of variation is determined.

  Here, first, the random number value for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and then, based on the big hit lottery result (winning lottery, symbol lottery), the following hit fluctuation pattern distribution table (not shown) or loss variation pattern distribution table (see FIG. (Not shown). Then, based on the variation pattern distribution table and the random number value for variation pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by lottery.

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table)
The variation pattern distribution table of this embodiment includes a “winning variation pattern distribution table” that is selected when winning a win (big hit or small win), and a “for lose” selected when winning a win. And “variation pattern distribution table”.

  Each variation pattern allocation table includes a variation pattern allocation designation number (current game state), the number of active reserved balls (excluding the active reserved balls used for the current variable display operation, the remaining number of active reserved balls “0” ”To“ 3 ”), the jackpot lottery result (the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (step S410)), the random number for the variation pattern (the size of the random number: 239), and the like are determined in association with each other. Any variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns by lottery using variation pattern random numbers.

  As the variation pattern is determined, a “variation time determination table” corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined. In this “variation time determination table”, the variation time (symbol variation display operation time) is defined. By referring to the variation time determination table corresponding to the determined variation pattern, the variation of the present variation pattern The time will be fixed. This variation time is the game time of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display time (effect time)).

  Information on the variation pattern determined in this way mainly includes another winning / losing winning lottery result (detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current gaming state type, It includes the variable time, execution designation information of a specific notice effect (designation information of reach production type (N reach, normal SP reach 1-7, etc.), and designation information of pseudo-continuous number of times). The CPU 201 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that can specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command. The effect during the current symbol variation display game is controlled to appear.

(About 2R short open latency big win / small win win pattern)
In this embodiment, the same hit variation pattern (normal 2R latent / small per hit, normal 2R latent / small per 2 is selected for the case where 2R short open latent large hit is won and the small win is selected. In this case, the same variation time (direction time) is determined when the 2R short open latent big win is won and when the small win is won. This is in order to perform an effect process that makes it unclear which win is won.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, when the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step 412 is completed, the special symbol N varying flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the variation is being displayed is set to 5AH (ON state). ) Is stored (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating the big hit type, the small hit type, and the loss type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). For example, the upper byte (MODE) side is set to “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is Special Figure 1, “BCH” is set to Special Figure 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is selected as winning. “01H” to “02H” when the type is Loss A to B, “03H” to “05H” when the small hits A to C, and the 16R long open condition with a big hit (7 hits directly on the 7 patterns) Is "06H", 16R long / short open condition with probability variation big hit (non 7 symbols per hit) is "07H", 12R long / short open condition with positive variation big hit (B other than 7 symbols per B is "08H"), 14R long / short open condition exact variable big hit (Scenario BB1) is "09H", 14R long / short open condition with probability change big hit (Scenario BB2) is "0AH", 14R long / short open condition with probability change big hit (Scenario BB3) is "0BH", 14R long / short open condition with probability change big hit Scenario BB4) is “0CH”, 14R long short open non-probable big hit (scenario BB5) is “0DH”, 16R long open condition positive variable big hit (C per 7 symbols) is “0EH”, 12R long open condition positive variable big hit (7 “0FH” for non-design symbols and “10H” for 2R short open latency large hits are set. Since this decoration designating command includes winning type information, the effect control unit 24 side mainly performs a combination of decorative symbols (reach symbols) when forming the reach state, or a decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. This is used when determining the combination of (decoration stop symbol). For example, if there is a direct contact with 7 symbols, the decoration stop symbol is stopped with a combination of “777”.

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 13)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first acquires a big hit determination flag and determines the state of the big hit determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), the big hit gaming state transition table selection table (FIG. 58) is acquired (step S432).

  Next, referring to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table (FIG. 59A) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433). The data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 16) during the special electric utility management process described later, and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). And the counter storage area). When the process of step S434 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) of FIG. In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a big win is won is performed, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a small win is won is an electric game management process described later. The small hitting process is performed (see step S504 in FIG. 16).

(T-4. Big hit gaming state transition table selection table: FIG. 58)
FIG. 58 shows a big hit gaming state transition table selection table. In the jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables associated with a gaming state determination number (YJ) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here a jackpot type) are determined. Specifically, based on the game state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, one of the game state transition tables shown in FIG. (Game state transition table) is selected.

  FIG. 60 shows a small hit gaming state transition table selection table. The small hit gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables ("JTTBL-5" to "JTTBL-") associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data. 7 ”: see FIG. 61). Specifically, based on the game state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, one of the small hit game state transition tables shown in FIG. It has come to be decided.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 62, when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal gaming state (no power support, low probability)” is set to “01H ”Is“ latent probability state (without electric support, high accuracy) ”,“ 02H ”is“ time-short state (electric support is present, low accuracy) ”, and“ 03H ”is“ probability change state ( "Electric support support state, high probability)". Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-5. Game state transition table: FIG. 59A)
FIG. 59A shows the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state transition table. The game state transition table of this embodiment includes “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-4” (FIG. 59A) of game state transition tables for jackpots that can be selected in the case of a jackpot.

  In these game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating game states to be transferred after winning games are defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the winning game is determined.

  “JTTBL-1” in this embodiment is a “conditional probability change state”, “JTTBL-2” is a “latent probability state”, and “JTTBL-4” is a “time-short state” game state transition table. It is. The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “normal symbol short time state flag” indicating that the normal symbol short time function is in operation. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol time reduction state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

  Further, when the game state transition table is referred to in the game state transition preparation process of FIG. 13, it is not yet determined whether or not the winning game is to win a V and shift to the probability variation state, so the special symbol probability variation transition state buffer is stored. Does not contain a value. What value the special symbol accuracy state flag should take is determined at the end of the big hit (step S595 in FIG. 24). At the end of the big hit, if it is confirmed that a V prize is won during the big hit game (when the V passing flag is ON), a value (5AH) for making a probable change state by referring to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B Is set in the special symbol accuracy state flag, and if it is not confirmed that the V prize has been won (when the V passing flag is OFF), refer to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. The value (00H) to be set is set in the special symbol accuracy state flag.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 15B).

  Further, when it is referred to in the game state transition preparation process in FIG. 13, it is not yet determined whether or not the winning game is won and a transition is made to the probability change state. Therefore, a value is stored in the special symbol short time counter. Absent. What value the special symbol short-time counter should take is determined at the end of the jackpot (step S595 in FIG. 24), and it is confirmed that a V prize is won during the jackpot game (when the V passing flag is ON). Referring to the big-hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B, a value (70 times) for setting the probability variation state is set in the special symbol time-count counter, and it is not confirmed that the V prize is won (V passing) When the flag is OFF), a value (50 times) for setting the short time state is set in the special symbol short time counter with reference to the jackpot end transition table shown in FIG. 59B.

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is finished, that is, the “high probability state” is ended due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

  Further, when it is referred to in the game state transition preparation process of FIG. 13, it is not yet determined whether or not it will shift to the probability variation state by winning a V in the big hit game, so a value is stored in the special symbol probability variation counter. Absent. What value the special symbol probability variation counter should take is determined at the end of the jackpot (step S595 in FIG. 24), and it is confirmed that a V prize is won during the jackpot game (when the V passing flag is ON). Referring to the jackpot end transition table shown in FIG. 59B, a value (70 times) for setting the probability variation state is set in the special symbol probability variation counter, and it is not confirmed that the V prize has been won (V passing). When the flag is OFF), the special symbol probability changing counter is set to a value (0 times) for setting the short time state with reference to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B.

  As described above, when JTTBL-1 and JTTBL-4 are referred to in the game state transition preparation process of FIG. 13, it is still uncertain whether or not to shift to the probable change state by winning V in the big hit game. Therefore, the special symbol probability change transition buffer, special symbol time reduction counter buffer, special symbol probability change counter buffer, variable pattern allocation specification number buffer, and special symbol change count are set as the setting values for determining the probability change state or the time reduction state. The counter buffer has been described with reference to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B at the end of the big hit (step S595 in FIG. 24). It is not limited to this. For example, when being referred to in the game state transition preparation process of FIG. 13, when JTTBL-1 is referred to, it is assumed that the transition to the probability variation state is made once, so that each buffer is transitioned to the probability variation state. When a corresponding value is set and JTTBL-4 is referred to, it is assumed that the time shifts to the short time state, and the corresponding value for shifting to the short time state is set for each buffer. The big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 6 may be referred to and rewritten to a value according to the V pass flag ON / OFF.

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used for setting the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is game state data for specifying the game state. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203, and this variation pattern allocation designation number is changed when the gaming state is changed. (Managed by (steps S481, S486, S490 of special symbol confirmation time processing (FIG. 15B), game state transition preparation processing (S411 of FIG. 12, S434 of FIG. 13, special electric equipment management processing ( FIG. 16)).

  When it is referred to in the game state transition preparation process of FIG. 13, it is not yet determined whether or not to shift to the probable change state by winning a V in the big hit game, so there is a value in the variation pattern allocation designation number (storage area). Is not stored. What value the change pattern allocation designation number should take is determined at the end of the jackpot (step S595 in FIG. 24), and it is confirmed that a V prize is won during the jackpot game (when the V passing flag is ON) ) With reference to the transition table at the end of jackpot shown in FIG. 59B, the value (03H) for setting the probability variation state is set to the variation pattern allocation designation number (storage area), and it is not confirmed that the V prize has been won. In the case (when the V passage flag is OFF), the value (04H) for setting the time reduction state is set in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (storage area) with reference to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B. .

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the present embodiment, for example, when “small hit” or “2R short open latency probability change big hit” is won, “normal C (normal or latent)”, “normal B (normal or latent)” to “normal A” The game state transition conditions of 15 times, 30 times, 100 times, etc. are set as the game state transition conditions (see FIGS. 59A and 60).

  In addition, when it is referred to in the game state transition preparation process of FIG. 13, it is not yet determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state by winning a V in the big hit game, so a value is stored in the special symbol variation number counter. Absent. What value the special symbol variation counter should take is determined at the end of the jackpot (step S595 in FIG. 24), and it is confirmed that a V prize is won during the jackpot game (when the V passing flag is ON). Referring to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B, the value for the probability variation state (0 times) is set in the special symbol fluctuation number counter, and when it is not confirmed that the V prize has been won (V passing) When the flag is OFF), the value for the short time state (0 times) is set in the special symbol variation counter with reference to the big hit end transition table shown in FIG. 59B.

(8-4. Special symbol change processing: Fig. 14)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet passed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). By this change stop command, the production control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the special symbol change time has elapsed, and stops and displays (determined display) the decorative symbol that is currently being changed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIGS. 15A and 15B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  15A and 15B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). Here, the “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer (see step S453 in FIG. 14). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (normal state specification) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and a game state notification LED (not shown) is designated to be turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, when the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the special symbol short-time state end count (50 times in the short-time state, 70 times in the probability variation state) has not been reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S483.

  If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time of short time end is performed assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). By receiving the short end command at this time, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the “no electric support” state is entered from the next game. In this embodiment, since the transition from the power support state to the power support state is the same as the transition to the normal state, when the effect control unit 24 receives this “short time end command”, the normal state When the decorative pattern variation display game to be performed next is started, the effect control processing under the normal effect mode is performed by switching to the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode”. Do.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current symbol variation variation digest, and the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST specified number of times (70 in this embodiment) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), setting processing at the end of probability variation is performed assuming that the special symbol variation count has reached the ST specified count (step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  When the setting process at the end of probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, whether or not the prescribed number of game state transitions (CZ continuation number) is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the game state transition setting process is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation number has reached the prescribed game state transition number (step S490: variation pattern change). Minute designation number setting process). Here, “00H (ordinary A designation)” is stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) as the transition setting process to “normal A”. As a result, the selection condition for the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed. Specifically, “normal B” or “normal C” ends in the special symbol fluctuation display game of this time, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern in “normal A” is selected in the next special symbol fluctuation display game. It will be. This step S490 process functions as a selection condition switching means for switching and controlling the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined selection change condition.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including the game state information of the transfer destination is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “gaming state designation command”, the effect control unit 24 grasps that “normal B” or “normal C” ends and “normal A” starts from the next game. Thereby, when starting the decoration pattern variation display game to be performed next, the effect control unit 24 switches to the background image (background effect) for the “normal A effect mode” and performs the effect control process under the effect mode. Do.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step S060 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 16)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), a small hit process is performed to control a series of operations of the special variable winning device 52 related to the small hit game (step S504). , Exit this special electric equipment management process.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH),
Processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning device 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203. Is done.

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  The big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described below.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit start process (step S505 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit start process.

(9-1. Big hit start processing: FIG. 17)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, the big hit starting process is first performed.

  In FIG. 17, first, the CPU 201 performs a setting process at the time of starting the big hit necessary for starting the big hit game (step S511: setting process at the time of starting the big hit). Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operating device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (special electric accessory) 01H is stored in the object operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since “01H” is set in the continuous number counter here, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, the jackpot start setting table (FIG. 52) is acquired (step S512), and the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) and rounds are determined according to the special symbol determination data (jacket type) with reference to the jackpot start setting table. The display LED numbers are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203, and the “big hit start interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S513: setting processing for each special symbol determination data). Hereinafter, in some cases, “interval” is abbreviated as “INT”.

(T-13. Big hit start setting table: FIG. 52)
In the jackpot start setting table of this embodiment, “special symbol determination data” for identifying the jackpot type and “maximum number of rounds, jackpot start interval time, and round display LED number” are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the “maximum number of rounds, jackpot start interval time, and round display LED” are determined according to the special symbol determination data. Here, the “big hit start interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time elapses and the big win is fixed (see step S471 in FIG. 15A in step S453 in FIG. 14), the special variable winning device 52 is activated. Time interval for the interval (start INT) section until the 1R round game starts, usually about the section where the opening (fanfare) performance is performed (the first performance section before the first round game is performed) Refers to the time span. The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round number display means), and indicates the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of the current big hit game.

  In the jackpot start setting table of FIG. 52, “shortest number of seconds on software” is written in the column of the jackpot start interval time, the shortest time on the program (4 ms of the timer interruption period on the main control side or It is meant to be set to a value that cannot be visually recognized by humans, and the “big hit start interval” is substantially omitted.

  When the setting process for each special symbol determination data in step S513 is completed, a “big hit start command” instructing the start of the hit effect, that is, the start of the OP effect, is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S514). In addition to the role of instructing the start of the OP performance, the “big hit start command” includes information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Also used when performing a series of winning effects developed during a game (a series of winning effects scenarios including OP effects, round effects, round end effects, and ED effects corresponding to each type of jackpot) Is done.

  As described above, when the big hit starting process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing: FIG. 18)
Next, the special electric accessory activation start process (step S506 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory activation start process.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S521). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “big hit start interval time” set in step S513 of FIG. 17 is monitored, but when passing through this step S521 after the 1R, it remains. The “interval time before opening (interval time set in step S575 in FIG. 23 described later) 20 ms” following the ball discharge time (1980 ms) is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S521: NO), this special electric accessory operation start processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before release has elapsed (step S521: YES), the “big prize opening command ( Round start command) ”is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S522). This “big prize opening opening command” includes round game start information and current round number information, and can be used when the stage control unit 24 displays a round stage corresponding to the number of rounds.

  Next, a special winning opening operating time setting table (see FIG. 53) is acquired (step S523), and a special winning opening opening operation time setting process is performed (step S524). In this special winning opening opening time setting process, the special winning opening operation time corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is referred to the special winning opening operation time setting table. Thus, the opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds is set.

(T-14. Grand prize opening time setting table: FIG. 53)
FIG. 53 shows a special winning opening operating time setting table. In the special winning opening operating time setting table of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the special winning opening opening operation time associated with the special symbol determination data and the current round number is defined, and the special symbol determining data and The grand prize opening operation time is determined according to the current number of rounds. As shown in the figure, in the case of 16R long opening condition with probability variation big hit (7 symbols direct hit, 7 symbols per C), the initial winning opening time is 29R, which is equivalent to the long open time as 2R short. In the case of the large open probability, 100 ms corresponding to the short open time is set as the initial value. In addition, 16R long / short open condition probability variation big hit (A / B other than 7 symbols), 12R long / short open condition probability variation big hit (B / B other than 7 symbols), 14R long / short open condition exact variation big hit (Battle bonus BB1-5), 12R long / short open In the case of probability variation (D per other than 7 symbols), the initial value is set to 29800 ms for long open and 100 ms or 80 ms for short open.

  As described above, in the special winning opening opening operation time setting process, the maximum symbol opening time is 29.8 seconds for the long opening time and 0.1 seconds or 0.08 seconds for the short opening time. The solenoid control data for storing and controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set. As a result, the special prize opening solenoid 52c is operated, and the special prize opening 50 is opened with the upper prize opening / closing operation time as an upper limit.

  Next, 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the special winning opening winning number counter (step S525). The “large winning opening winning number counter” is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 50.

  Next, a special winning opening / closing operation setting process is performed (step S526). In the special winning opening / closing operation setting process, solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 52c is created. The data set here is used in the solenoid management process (step S064) in FIG. Details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process in step S526 is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Active (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is performed. The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(9-2-1. Grand prize opening / closing operation setting process: FIG. 19)
Next, the special winning opening / closing operation setting process (step S526 in FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting processing in step S526.

  In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first obtains a special winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table (see FIG. 54) (step S531), and refers to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table to obtain special symbol determination data and A special winning opening opening / closing operation setting table (FIG. 55) corresponding to the current number of rounds is acquired (step S532).

(T-15. Grand prize opening / closing operation setting table selection table: FIG. 54)
FIG. 54 shows the special winning opening opening operation setting table selection table. In the special winning opening opening operation setting table selection table of this embodiment, the special symbol determination data (01 [H] to 0B [H]) and the current round number (1R to 16R) are associated with FIG. ) Large winning opening / closing operation setting tables (“OPENBL-D1”, “OPENBL-D2”, “OPENBL-D3”)) are determined, and the large symbol in accordance with the special symbol determination data and the current round number. A winning opening / closing operation setting table is determined. Details of the above-described special winning opening / closing operation setting table will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 for convenience of explanation.

  Next, a special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired (step S533). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, the initial value of the special winning opening opening operation time is set (see step S524 of the special electric accessory start process in FIG. 19). That is, one of “29800 ms”, “100 ms”, and “80 ms” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here.

  Next, a solenoid setting process is performed (step S534). In this solenoid setting process, the solenoid control data for the special prize opening solenoid 52c is created mainly with reference to the special prize opening / closing operation setting table, and the special prize is obtained. Specify the mouth opening / closing pattern. Details of the solenoid setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the solenoid process in step S534 is completed, the special electric accessory activation start process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(9-2-2. Solenoid setting process: FIG. 20)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the solenoid setting process in step S534. In order to facilitate understanding of the solenoid setting process, first, the special winning opening / closing operation setting table acquired in step S532 will be described.

(T-16. Grand prize opening / closing operation setting table: FIG. 55)
FIG. 55 shows a special prize opening / closing operation setting table. FIG. 55 (a) shows an example of the big winning prize opening / closing operation setting table for big hits, and FIG. 55 (b) shows an example of the big winning prize opening / closing operation setting table for small hits.

(T-16-1: Big winning prize opening / closing operation setting table for jackpot: FIG. 55 (A))
With reference to FIG. 55 (a), the big winning prize winning opening / closing operation setting table will be described. The jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation setting table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of big winning big winning opening opening / closing operation setting tables “OPENBL-D1”, “OPENBL-D2”, and “OPENBL-D3”.

  In each jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting table OPENBL-D1, -D2, -D3, data necessary for designating the opening / closing operation pattern of the big winning opening relating to the big hit game is defined. Specifically, data for specifying the state of the special electric accessory actuating flag and data for specifying the state of the special winning opening opening flag according to the special symbol accessory operating timer value are determined.

  The “special electric accessory actuating flag” is a flag used for confirming whether or not the special variable winning device 52 is operating. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), a special When the variable winning device 52 is in operation, and the flag is OFF (= 00H), it indicates that the special variable winning device 52 is inactive. In addition, during the period when the special electric accessory actuating flag is ON (= 5 AH) between round games, that is, during the period when the special variable prize winning device is in operation, the big prize opening is closed after the big prize opening is opened. After that, the remaining ball discharge time (first predetermined time: 1980 ms) is elapsed. On the other hand, the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) elapses during the period in which the special electric accessory actuated flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is not activated. It is a period in the interval time (second predetermined time: 20 ms) from when the next round game starts. Also, if a prize is generated at the special winning opening during the period when the special electric accessory activation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it is regarded as an illegal prize and a predetermined error processing such as sounding an alarm sound from the speaker 46 (unauthorized) (Winning detection error processing) is executed.

  The “big prize opening opening flag” is a flag used to create solenoid control data for the big prize opening solenoid 52c. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), solenoid control is performed. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the excitation signal output stop (special prize opening is closed) is designated.

  The “timer value” shown in the figure indicates the timer value of the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533, which will be described later, and the “set value” corresponding to the timer value indicates the flag for opening the special prize opening. The setting value is shown. That is, when the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533 reaches the timer value shown in the figure, the “set value” corresponding to this is stored in the special winning opening release flag. For example, referring to “OPENBL-D2” shown in the figure, when the special symbol accessory operation timer is “29800 ms”, the corresponding set value is “5AH”, so “5AH” is stored in the special winning opening release flag. . Thereafter, “5AH” is stored in the special winning opening release flag until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches “0 ms”. When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes “0 ms”, the corresponding set value is “00H”, and therefore “00H” is stored in the special winning opening release flag. The above set value is confirmed as solenoid control data in the solenoid management process (step S64) of FIG. 8, and when “5AH” is stored in the big prize opening opening flag, the big prize opening solenoid 52c. Thus, an excitation signal is output, thereby operating the open door 52b to open the special winning opening 50. On the other hand, when “00H” is stored in the special winning opening opening flag, the output of the excitation signal is stopped, whereby the open door 52b returns to the original position and the special winning opening 50 is closed. It is like that. Therefore, when “OPENBL-D2” for long opening is selected, if the maximum number of winnings is not reached after opening the big winning opening 50, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 becomes a long opening time of 29800 ms. When “OPENBL-D1” for short opening is selected, if the maximum number of winnings is not reached after opening the big winning opening 50, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 is a short opening time of 100 ms. Similarly, when “OPENBL-D3” for short opening is selected, if the maximum number of winnings is not reached after opening the big winning opening 50, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 becomes a short opening time of 80 ms.

(T-16-2: Big winning opening / closing operation setting table for small hits: FIG. 55 (b))
Next, with reference to FIG. 55 (b), the small winning big opening / closing operation setting table will be described. The big hit prize opening / closing operation setting table (OPENBL-D5) of the present embodiment defines data necessary for designating the opening pattern of the big prize opening relating to the small hit game. The configuration is the same as that of the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting table shown in FIG. The big winning opening / closing operation setting table for small hits is acquired in the process of step S608 during the small hit process of FIG.

  The “OPENBL-D5” shown in the figure is related to “OPENTBL-D1”, “OPENBL-D2” and “OPENBL-D3” in the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting table described above with respect to the setting of the winning opening opening flag. Is different. In “OPENBL-D5”, “5AH” is “2200 ms”, “00H” is “2100 ms”, “5AH” is “100 ms”, and “00H” is “0 ms”. Is designated to be stored in the flag for opening the prize winning opening, the opening / closing operation of the prize winning opening 50 is opened for 100 ms, then closed for 2000 ms, again opened for 100 ms, and then closed. It becomes.

  Here, referring to the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting table selection table of FIG. 54, “OPENBL-D1” is selected in the 1R to 2R per 2R short-opening probability maximum. In the case of “OPENBL-D1,” the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 is 100 ms. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings cannot be reached within this opening time. For this reason, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 during the 2R latent hit game is opened for 100 ms and then closed for 2000 ms of the interval time between round games (total time of remaining ball discharge time and interval time before opening). Then, the game moves to the next round game, opens again for 100 ms, and then closes. As will be described later, both the 2R latent big hit game and the small hit game are provided with 1000 ms for the big hit start interval time, that is, the OP effect time, and 5000 ms for the big hit end interval time, that is, the ending effect time (described later). (See FIGS. 57 and 26). Thus, the behavior of the small hit game and the behavior of the 2R latent probability variation big hit game are substantially the same.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 20, the solenoid setting process will be described. 20, first, the CPU 201 refers to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table acquired in step S532 of FIG. 19 and stores 5AH in the special electric accessory operation flag (step S541). Here, reference is made to the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting table OPENBL-D1, PENTBL-D2, or PENTBL-D3 in FIG.

  Next, the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533 is compared with the timer value of the table with reference to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table (step S542), and the corresponding “set value” is set as the special winning opening. Stored in the release flag (step S543). Here, as described above, the initial value of the special prize opening operation time “29800 ms”, “100 ms”, or “80 ms” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533. (Refer to step S524 of the special electric accessory starting process in FIG. 19). That is, here, only the opening of the special winning opening 50 is specified (see the special winning opening release flag column in the special winning opening / closing operation setting table in FIG. 55).

  As described above, when the solenoid process is exited, the special electric accessory activation start process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. The special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process (step S526) is used as a common processing module in the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process (step S552) during the special electric accessory operating process of FIG. . As a result, the processing related to the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening can be made more efficient, which contributes to the reduction of the program amount and the memory amount.

  Although not shown, regarding the V winning opening / closing operation, a V attacker timer for managing the operation of the V attacker and a “V attacker opening / closing operation setting table” for designating the opening / closing operation pattern of the V winning opening. "V attacker opening / closing operation setting table for non-V opening round" for realizing short opening (maximum opening time 0.1s) operation of V attacker and long opening (maximum opening time 29s) operation of V attacker “V opener open / close operation setting table for V open round” is provided, and further, according to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds, one of these open / close operation setting tables is selected. A “V prize opening opening / closing operation setting table selection table” is provided. The basic configuration of each of the opening / closing operation setting tables is the same as that of the big winning prize winning opening / closing operation setting table or the small winning big prize opening / closing operation setting table described above. "Is the same as the above-described special winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table. Although a detailed description is omitted to avoid repeated description, in short, the opening / closing operation control for the V winning opening can employ the same control method as the opening / closing control of the large winning opening 50. Using each of the above tables, the opening / closing operation of the V attacker according to the type of jackpot is realized.

  In the present embodiment, as already described, when a game ball enters the V prize opening, the V prize opening is immediately closed. This is the same control method as the open / close control of the big prize opening 50. Specifically, when the number of winning balls to the big prize opening 50 reaches the maximum number (for example, nine), the big prize is won. This is the same as the control method in which the mouth 50 is immediately closed by the open door 52b (configuration of clearing the special electric accessory operation timer and closing the special winning opening 50: S565 in FIG. 22 described later). The maximum number of winnings is set as “1”. Of course, the maximum number of winnings for the V winning award may be determined in plural. In addition, when the V prize opening is formed inside the big prize opening 50, the big prize opening 50 can be opened and closed in each round game, and the V attacker can be opened and closed in conjunction with the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening. That is, if the big prize opening is short open, the V attacker is also short open, and if the big prize opening is long open, the V attacker is also long open. Thus, depending on the type of jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 39 to 50, the jackpot gaming operation mode including the V opening round (V winning opening length opening) and the non-V opening round (V winning opening short opening). Can be realized. In this case, the opening / closing operation control of the V-attacker can be performed using the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting table selection table (FIG. 54) and the big winning big opening opening / closing operation setting table (FIG. 55) as they are. . That is, it is only necessary to output an excitation signal (excitation signal for the V attacker solenoid) to the V attacker solenoid at the same timing as the output timing of the excitation signal to the prize winning solenoid 52c of the prize winning opening 50. The opening / closing control of the V attacker linked to the mouth can be realized. Also, since the big winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table (FIG. 54) and the big winning big opening / closing operation setting table (FIG. 55) are used as they are, the control burden related to the game operation can be reduced.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory: FIG. 21)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operating process.

  In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first performs a large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551). In the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process, the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 is mainly counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number. Details of the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S551 is completed, the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting processing is performed (step S552). The special prize opening / closing operation setting process here is the same as the special prize opening / closing action setting process (step S526) during the special electric accessory activation start process of FIG. Description is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S553). Since the special winning symbol action timer is set with the special winning opening operation time, the determination process of step S533 determines whether or not the special winning action operation time has elapsed. Become. Until the special symbol accessory operating timer becomes zero (step S553: NO), the special electric accessory operating process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol feature action timer reaches zero (elapsed time for opening the big prize opening operation time) (step S553: YES), a "round end command" is produced, assuming that the big prize opening in this round game is closed. It transmits to the control part 24 (step S554). This round end command is also referred to as an “inter-round interval command” because it means the beginning when viewed from the INT side between rounds. This “round end command (inter-round INT command)” is used, for example, when the “round end effect” appears as an effect during the inter-round interval period following the round game on the effect control unit 24 side. An effect starting from the beginning of the interval between rounds, for example, “INT between rounds” + “1R opening” + “INT between rounds”, which will be described later, “failure → second time”, “V winning effect (V opening) This can be used as an opportunity to produce effects such as “Round Effect” and “Failure → Third Time” (see FIG. 46).

  Next, various setting processes when the round game ends are performed (step S555). Here, as various setting processes at the end of the round game, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special symbol accessory operation timer is set. The remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) is stored.

  In this embodiment, the remaining ball discharge time set after each round game has the same time width (1980 ms), but is not limited thereto. Since the remaining ball discharge time is determined as an allowance time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening after the big prize opening is closed, the internal structure of the big prize opening (for example, the big prize opening sensor 52a). In consideration of the maximum path length until the game ball is detected), the maximum time required until the prize winning hole sensor 52a detects the game ball (or until the game ball is discharged to the outside from the prize winning opening) The expected time span is set. However, when the round game is controlled in a plurality of types of operation modes, different remaining ball discharge times may be set by paying attention to each operation mode. For example, paying attention to the fact that the winning rate at the grand prize opening is relatively low during a round game related to a short opening time, the game balls are frequently bitten by the open / close door 52b, and there are many game balls crowded in the big prize opening. Since it is not expected, the remaining ball discharge time may be a relatively short time width compared to during the round game related to the long open time.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operating process is exited, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-3-1. Largest winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing: FIG. 22)
Next, the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551 in FIG. 21) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting process.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the special electric accessory operation flag (step S561). When the special electric accessory operating flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S561: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the special variable winning device 52 is not operating, the process exits the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process without doing anything. . Here, “the case where the special variable winning device 52 is not in operation” refers to the case during the pre-opening interval time (during start INT or during round INT).

  When the special electric accessory actuating flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S561: = 5 AH), it is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the special winning opening 50 (step S562).

  If no winning is detected at the big winning opening 50 (step S562: NO), the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when a winning is detected at the big winning opening 50 (step S562: YES), 1 is added to the big winning opening winning counter (step S563), and the process proceeds to step S564. Each time the grand prize winning counter is incremented by 1 in this step S563, a winning command is transmitted. In other words, a winning command is transmitted every time a winning ball is generated at the big winning opening 50 during a round game. The special winning opening winning command includes information on a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, 13).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the extra winning opening winning counter after the addition has reached the maximum number of winning (for example, 9) (step S564). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached (step S565: NO), the process proceeds to step S566.

  On the other hand, when the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S564: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S565). When the maximum number of winnings has been reached, the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared, so that the timer value when the special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired during the large winning opening / closing operation setting processing in the subsequent step S552 is zero. (See step S533 in FIG. 19), and “00H” is stored in the large winning opening opening flag in the solenoid setting process to be executed next (see steps S542 to S543 in FIG. 20). The open large winning opening 50 is closed with the fact that it has reached.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening is a round (special round) (step S566). Among special rounds, depending on the type of jackpot, there are a mix of “V open round” in which the V prize opening is long open and “non-V open round” in which the V winning opening is short open. Among them, it is a V-opening round that should be particularly noted in the sense that whether or not to win a V prize will be bound. If it is a special round (step S566: YES), it is determined whether the V winning switch provided at the V winning opening is turned on by the game ball that has entered the V winning opening. When the V winning switch is turned on (step S567: YES), the V passing flag is turned on to retain information on the V winning (step S568), and a V winning command indicating that the V winning is sent is sent to the big winning Exit the maximum number of winnings confirmation process. The V passing flag is cleared in step S597 during the big hit end process described later.

  If it is not a special round (step S566: NO), nothing is done and the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is exited. If the V-winning switch is not turned on in spite of the special round (step S566: YES, step S567: NO), the V-winning could not be won in the 12th round in scenario BB4 (non-probable big hit) It is. In this case, too, nothing is done and the maximum winning opening maximum number-of-wins confirmation process is exited.

  In the case where the V winning switch is not turned on in spite of the special round (step S566: YES, step S567: NO), in the case of the conditional probability variation big hit, was the flow path blocked by grape clogging? Included is a case where the player could not enter the V winning opening because the player intentionally stopped the launch. Therefore, in the judgment of the special round, it is distinguished whether it is a special round with a conditional probability big hit or a non-probable big jackpot, and the V winning switch is set regardless of whether it is a special round with a conditional probability big hit. If it is not turned ON, a command to that effect is transmitted to the production control unit side, and the production control unit side receives this command from the production scenario for notifying the normal V prize winning. It is preferable to replace the production scenario.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to treat V winnings in all special rounds as valid. This is an extremely low probability even when the V attacker is short-opened as in the non-V-opening round, but considering that there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the V winning opening. If the player is lucky enough to win the V prize in the V-opening round, it will be possible to shift to the probabilistic state as a bonus, and create a situation that can shift to the probable state even in the case of “non-probable big hit” Yes. As a result, despite the “non-probable big hit”, it is possible to shift to a probable change state and create an unexpected gameability. When a V prize is generated in the case of a non-probable big hit, it is preferable that a special V prize effect different from the normal (V prize (probable GET production or V prize production) at the time of a promiscuous big hit) appears.

  Of the special rounds, the V passing flag may be turned ON only when a game ball enters the V winning opening in the V open round.

  As described above, when the large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process is completed, the process proceeds to the large winning opening / closing operation setting process in step S552 of FIG. This is due to the processing modules common to those described in FIG.

(9-4. Special Electric Goods Operation Continuation Determination Process: FIG. 23)
Next, the details of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S571). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, since the remaining ball discharge time after closing the big prize opening is set (see step S555 in FIG. 21), in the determination processing of step S571, the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. It will be determined whether or not. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S5571: NO), the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed) (step S571: YES), the continuous number counter is acquired and the current number of rounds becomes the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). It is determined whether or not it has been reached (step S572).

  If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (step S572: NO), the processing of steps S573 to S576 (round continuation processing) is performed as processing when the round game is continued. However, when the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S572: YES), processing at steps S577 to S580 (round continuation end processing) is performed as processing at the time of ending the round game.

(Round continuation processing: steps S573 to S576)
If the current number of rounds has not reached the maximum number of rounds (step S572: NO), the processing route of steps S573 to S576 is entered.

  First, in the process of step S573, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter (step S573).

  Next, a special electric accessory end interval setting table is acquired (step S574). With reference to the special electric accessory end interval setting table, “before opening” corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the added continuous number counter is obtained. The “interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S575).

(T-17. Special electric accessory end interval setting table: FIG. 56)
FIG. 56 shows a special electric accessory end interval (interval before opening) setting table. The pre-release interval time associated with the special symbol determination data and the continuous number counter is defined in the special electric accessory end interval setting table of the present embodiment. Specifically, the interval time before release is determined according to the special symbol determination data and the current value of the continuous number counter (the continuous number counter value after the addition processing in step S573). Therefore, in this specification, the special electric accessory end interval setting table is also referred to as “pre-opening interval setting table”.

(T-17-1: In case of direct contact with 7 symbols)
Referring to the pre-opening interval setting table of FIG. 56, in the case of “7 symbol direct hit” (16R length open), the interval time before opening set after each round game of 1R to 15R except after the final round game. All have the same time width of 20 ms. Therefore, as the sum of the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) and the pre-release interval time (20 ms), the interval time between rounds after each round game of 1R to 15R is 2000 ms (2 seconds) except after the final 16R game. Will be determined.

  In the timing chart of FIG. 41, “1.98 seconds” is placed instead of “2 seconds” as the INT between rounds after 16 round games, and the 16th round (continuous) is set in the interval setting table before opening of FIG. Number counter value = 17) is not listed. The reason is that “INT between rounds after the last round game” is a time width determined only by setting the remaining ball discharge time to 1980 ms in step S555 of FIG. This is because the width is not related to the interval setting table before opening shown in FIG. Since the INT between rounds after the last round game is different from the INT between other rounds in that it does not include the interval time before opening, it is appropriate to explain it in the same row as the INT between other rounds including the interval time before opening. In some cases, it is sometimes referred to as “interval after the last round”.

  In the case of this example, the time value set in step S555 of FIG. 21 is the remaining ball discharge time 1980 ms, which is fixed. However, this is treated as a variable variable that can be reset, and by resetting it to a value other than 1980 ms, for example, 2000 ms in step S555, the interval time between rounds after the last round game is longer than the remaining ball discharge time of 1980 ms. For example, “2 seconds” can be created. In the case of this example, the INT between rounds after the last round game does not include the interval time before opening, but like other INTs between rounds, for example, 20 ms is set in the interval setting table before opening, An interval time between rounds (2 seconds in this example) longer than the remaining sphere discharge time 1980 ms can be created by combining the value 20 ms and the remaining sphere discharge time 1980 ms. These modifications are not only for the case of 7 symbols directly, but also for other types of hits described later (A for other than 7 symbols, B for other than 7 symbols, Scenarios BB1 to BB4, Scenario BB5, C for 7 symbols, 7 symbols. This also applies to the inter-round INT after the last round in the other hits D and 2R short-opening latent big hits).

  During the interval before opening, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S576 described later. Accordingly, the pre-opening interval time is a large winning opening prize invalid period in which the winning at the big winning opening is invalid (an illegal winning monitoring period during the big hit). There is no particular limitation on the interval time before opening, but as long as the interval time between round games including the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms in this embodiment) is provided, the time is extremely long, for example, If it is about several seconds, the waiting time between round games increases, and the player feels bothersome. Particularly in a big hit game with a maximum number of rounds of 16R, the total waiting time between round games is several tens of seconds to nearly one minute, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the interval time before opening is basically set to a short time of 20 ms. This is because when the game ball actually enters the winning opening and the ON signal of the winning detection switch is output, the output time (signal duration) is the longest although the rolling time of the winning ball is long or short. This is in consideration of about 20 ms. Goto action (for example, goto action that aims to win excessive prizes using a plastic board or piano wire to the grand prize opening (Selgoto), or an act of illegal acts that causes the switch to malfunction by using a fraudulent instrument to aim for excessive prizes) Etc.), it is expected that an ON signal is frequently output from the big prize opening sensor 52a. Therefore, it is considered that there is no problem in monitoring illegal winnings between round games even if the interval time before opening is set to about 20 ms which is a proper ON signal signal duration. It is considered that fraudulent acts are easier to detect if the time is longer than that, but considering the waiting time between round games, the interval time before opening is in the range of about 20 ms to several hundred ms, and at most 1020 ms. It is considered appropriate to set the value up to (interval between rounds is 3 seconds). In this embodiment, the remaining ball discharge time is set to a fixed value of 1980 ms. However, the remaining ball discharge time is regarded as a changeable value (variable), and the remaining ball discharge time is set relatively depending on the form of the big prize opening (internal structure, etc.). It may be a short time. In this case, “remaining ball discharge time ≦ interval time before opening” may be set. For example, when the interval time between round games is set to 2000 ms, “the remaining ball discharge time is 1000 ms and the interval time before release is 1000 ms” or “the remaining ball discharge time is 500 ms and the interval time before release is 1500 ms”. May be.

(T-17-2: A case other than 7 symbols)
Referring to the pre-release interval setting table in FIG. 56, in the case of “Around 7 symbols other than A” (16R long / short open: 10R long open + 6R short open), after each round game of 4 rounds, 8 rounds, and 12 rounds The interval time before opening is set to 1020 ms, and the interval time before opening after other round games except after the last round game is set to 20 ms. Therefore, as the sum of the remaining ball discharge time, the interval time between rounds after each round game of 4R, 8R, and 12R of 1R to 15R is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and other round games (1R to 3R, 5R) The interval time between rounds after 7R, 9R-11R, 13R-15R) is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds). It should be noted that INT between rounds after the final 16R game (interval after final round) is determined by setting the remaining ball discharge time to 1980 ms in step S555 of FIG.

(T-17-3: B in case of other than 7 symbols)
Referring to the pre-release interval setting table in FIG. 56, in the case of “B per other than 7 symbols” (12R long / short open: 10R long open + 2R short open), the open set after each round game of 4 rounds and 8 rounds The interval time before opening is 1020 ms, and the interval time before opening set after other round games except after the last round game is 20 ms. Therefore, the interval time between rounds, which is the sum of this and the remaining ball discharge time, is set to 3000 ms (3 seconds) between rounds after 4R and 8R round games of 1R to 11R, and other rounds. The interval time between rounds after a game (1R-3R, 5R-7R, 9R-11R) is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds). The interval between rounds after the 12R game of the final round (interval after the final round) is determined by setting the remaining ball discharge time of 1980 ms in step S555 of FIG.

(T-17-4: scenario BB1 to scenario BB5)
Referring to the interval setting table before release in FIG. 56, “scenario BB1” (14R long / short open: 10R long open + 4R short open), “scenario BB2” (14R long / short open: 11R long open + 3R short open), “scenario BB3” (14R long / short open: 12R long open + 2R short open), “Scenario BB4” (14R long / short open: 12R long open + 2R short open), “Scenario BB5” (14R long / short open: 11R long open + 3R short open) The interval time before opening set after each round game of 4 rounds and 8 rounds is 1020 ms, and the interval time before opening set after other round games except after the last round game is 20 ms. Therefore, as the sum of the remaining ball discharge time, the interval time between rounds after 4R, 8R, and 12R round games of 1R to 13R is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and other rounds except after the last round game The interval time between rounds after the game (1R-3R, 5R-7R, 9R-11R, 13R) is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds). The interval after the 14R game of the final round (interval after the final round) is determined by setting the remaining ball discharge time to 1980 ms in step S555 of FIG.

(T-17-5: C per case other than 7 symbols)
Referring to the pre-release interval setting table of FIG. 56, in the case of “C per other than 7 symbols” (16R long / short open), the pre-release interval time after each round game of 4 rounds, 8 rounds, and 12 rounds is 1020 ms. The interval time before opening after other round games except after the last round game is set to 20 ms. Therefore, as the sum of the remaining ball discharge time, the round interval time after each round game of 4R, 8R, and 12R out of 1R to 15R is 3000 ms (3 seconds), and other round games except after the last round game The interval time between rounds after (1R-3R, 5R-7R, 9R-11R, 13R-15R) is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds). Note that the interval after the 16R game in the final round (interval after round) is determined by setting the remaining ball discharge time to 1980 ms in step S555 of FIG.

(T-17-6: D per case other than 7 symbols)
Referring to the interval setting table before opening in FIG. 56, in the case of “D other than 7 symbols D” (12R long / short opening: 4R long opening + 8R short opening), the opening set after each round game of 4 rounds and 8 rounds. The interval time before opening is 1020 ms, and the interval time before opening set after other round games except after the last round game is 20 ms. Therefore, as the sum of the remaining ball discharge time, the interval time between rounds is set to 3000 ms (3 seconds) after each round game of 4R and 8R of 1R to 11R, and after the last round game. The interval time between rounds after other round games (1R to 3R, 5R to 7R, 9R to 11R) is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds). The interval after the 12R game in the final round (interval after round) is determined by setting the remaining ball discharge time to 1980 ms in step S555 of FIG.

  As can be seen from the above, in this embodiment, the interval time between rounds set after each round game is basically set as 2 seconds of a predetermined time (1.98 seconds after the last round game). On the other hand, the total length of all rounds (period of big hit) obtained by counting one round as a unit length is divided into a plurality of sections (for example, in the case of 16R, the total length is divided into three), and at the break (for example, The total length of 16R is divided into three sections (4R, 8R, and 12R), and the interval time between rounds after the round game is set to 3 seconds (3000ms) longer than the basic 2 seconds. doing. In this way, if the interval between rounds is different from the others (in this example, 3 seconds long) during the big hit period, this will appear. It can be used as an interval between outgoing sections (for example, a section for a probable GET chance effect or a V-opening round effect), or can be used as a time adjustment section for securing the length of the effect.

  In this embodiment, the interval time between rounds after 4R, 8R, and 12R is set to a value (3 seconds) different from the normal value (2 seconds) (see FIGS. 41 to 50). Not limited to. For example, it may be set to a value of a time width different from these, or the INT time between rounds set after each round game may be set to the same time width (2000 ms).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 23 again, when the process of step S575 is completed, various setting processes for continuing the round are performed (step S576). Here, as a setting process for starting the next round game after the end of the current round game, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. “Middle (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  When the above steps S573 to S576 (round continuation process) are completed, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(Round continuation end processing: steps S577 to S580)
When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds (step S572: YES), the processing route of steps S577 to S580 is entered.

  First, in the process of step S577, an accessory continuous actuating device operation end interval setting table is acquired (step S577). With reference to this accessory continuous actuating device operation end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the continuous after addition are set. The “big hit end interval time” corresponding to the number counter is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S578).

(T-18. Actor continuous action device operation end interval setting table: FIG. 57)
FIG. 57 shows an accessory continuous operation device operation end interval (big hit end interval) setting table. In the accessory continuous actuating device operation end interval setting table of the present embodiment, special symbol determination data and jackpot end interval time are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the jackpot end interval is determined according to the special symbol determination data. Time has come to be determined. The “big hit end interval time” is an interval section from the time when the round game of the last round is finished and the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed (the end of INT during the last round) to the end of the big hit game. Generally, it refers to a time span that defines a section in which an ED effect is performed (in this embodiment, only the ED effect in the case of direct contact with 7 symbols in FIG. 41 corresponds to this case).

  In FIG. 57, “the shortest number of seconds on the software” is described as the jackpot end interval time, which is set to the shortest time on the program (4 ms of the main control timer interruption period or a multiple thereof). By making such a value, the “big hit end interval” is substantially omitted.

  During the big hit end interval, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S579 described later. Accordingly, during the big hit end interval time, as in the pre-opening interval time, it becomes a big prize winning invalidation period in which winning to the big prize winning is invalid.

  When the process of step S578 is completed, various setting processes at the end of the round are performed (step S579). Here, as the setting process when reaching the maximum round, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (special electric accessory) 04H is stored in the operation status).

  Next, a “big hit end command” instructing the start of the ED effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S580). This "hit end command" includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, that is, information that can specify the gaming state (including the internal gaming state) after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “big hit end command” designates the game state because it can specify the game state after the big hit game is finished, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ED effect in the case of the 7 symbol direct hit of FIG. It also plays a role as a game state designation command. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command so that the game state after the jackpot end can be matched with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  It should be noted that the information that can specify the gaming state at the time of winning the above-mentioned jackpot can include information on the variation pattern allocation designation number, or information on the variation pattern allocation designation number and information on the internal gaming state. The jackpot end command may be a single command or a plurality of commands. In the case of a plurality of commands, for example, information that makes it possible to specify the current jackpot type in one jackpot end command, and information that makes it possible to specify the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in another jackpot end command These commands can be transmitted simultaneously or sequentially to the effect control unit 24 at a necessary timing. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of information are included in the effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the information may be included in a single effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit is divided into an effect control command including one information and an effect control command including other information, and the role of the single effect control command is divided into a plurality of effect control commands. It is good also as a structure which transmits to 24.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 24)
Next, the big hit ending process (step S509 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit end process.

  In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, since the jackpot end interval time is set, in the determination processing in step S591, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (elapse of the jackpot end interval time) (step S591: YES), the values of the transition state buffers are stored in the respective state flags as part of various settings at the end of the jackpot. (Step S592). Specifically, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 (see step S411 in FIG. 12, see FIG. 13 showing the details) during the special symbol variation start process is used as the game state. To specify the utility power open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, It is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number and the special symbol variation counter. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed (step S593). Here, as various data used during the big hit game control processing, the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter, the maximum number of rounds (the specified number of rounds), the normal electric goods open extension state buffer Normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition buffer, special symbol transition transition buffer, special symbol short counter buffer, special symbol variable counter buffer, variation pattern allocation specification number Clear the buffer, special figure variation counter buffer, round display LED number, and gaming state determination number (YJ) (store 00H), and switch the special electric accessory operation status to “Starting process (00H)” ( 00H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory.

  In the process of step S593, the special symbol determination data used in the current jackpot game is not cleared, but this special symbol determination data is not shown in FIG. 12 after the current jackpot game ends. When the special symbol creation process in step S412 during the special symbol variation start process is performed, there is no problem because new special symbol determination data is overwritten in the RAM 203 (special symbol determination data storage area). In this way, the amount of program required to clear the special symbol determination data at the end of the big hit game can be reduced. Of course, if necessary due to processing, the special symbol determination data is cleared in the processing of step S593, and when the new special symbol determination data is generated, the generated special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203. You may store in (special symbol determination data storage area). Each transition state buffer may be configured not to clear the value of each transition state buffer in the process of step S593. In this case, after the current big hit game ends, when the game state transition preparation process of step S411 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 12 is performed, a process of overwriting the new transition state buffer value may be performed. This is because each transition state buffer is only used in the process of step S592. In this way, the amount of program required to clear each transition state buffer at the end of the big hit game can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the V passage flag are checked (step S594). If the V-pass flag is turned on in step S568 in FIG. 22, it is confirmed that V has been won in a predetermined special round during the big hit game, so that the probability change transition of step S595 is made to shift to the probability change state. Proceed to state processing. In this probability changing state process, referring to the jackpot end time transition table “JTTBLB10” shown in FIG. 59B, the special symbol accuracy state flag is set to “5AH”, the special symbol time short-time counter is set to “70 times”, and the special symbol probability changing state is set. “70 times” is set in the number counter, “03H” is set in the variation pattern assignment designation number, and “70 times” is set in the special symbol variation number counter. Then, the V passing flag is cleared (step S597).

  If the V passing flag is not turned ON and remains OFF in step S568 in FIG. 22, it is a case where the V winning in the predetermined special round has not been confirmed (scenario BB5 for non-probable change big hit), and the state shifts to the time saving state. In order to do so, the process proceeds to the short time transition state process of step S596. In the short time transition state process, referring to the jackpot end transition table “JTTBLB40” shown in FIG. 59B, the special symbol accuracy state flag is set to “00H”, and the special symbol short time counter is set to “50 times”. “0” is set in the symbol probability variation counter, “04H” is set in the variation pattern assignment designation number, and “0” is set in the special symbol variation counter.

  Although not shown, in the case of 2R short open latency big hit, it is determined as a special big hit type. When the 2R short open latent big hit is won, the game state transition preparation process of FIG. After the corresponding value shown in “JTTBL-2” is stored in various transition state buffers and the corresponding value is stored in each state flag (step S592), the V pass flag is not turned ON / OFF. The value stored in each status flag is held. In other words, 2R short open latency big hit is a condition in which the game state after big hit game is shifted to “latent probability state” in which the big hit lottery probability state becomes a high probability state regardless of whether the V passing flag is ON / OFF. This is different from the case where the V passing flag is shifted to a high probability state depending on ON / OFF as in the case of accrual variation big hit. In this regard, it can be said that the 2R short-opening latent big hit functions as the original “probable big hit”.

  Thus, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot game can be determined regardless of whether the V passing flag is ON or OFF. During the jackpot game related to this specific jackpot, the V attacker may or may not be opened and closed. This is because the big hit type is irrelevant to ON / OFF of the V passing flag.

  As in this embodiment, by making a plurality of types of big hit types including conditional probability big hits and original probability changing big hits as internal lottery targets, the fun of the game can be further improved. The above-mentioned specific jackpot type can be provided in one or more types, and a big winning opening opening pattern related to a big hit game (round game or cycle game) by the specific jackpot, a V attacker open pattern, The number of specified rounds etc.) can be determined as appropriate. Further, it is not necessary to provide a specific big hit type (original probability variation big hit) such as 2R short-open latent big hit.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed (step S598). In this process, it is confirmed whether the special symbol time reduction state flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) or OFF state (≠ 5 AH), and in the case of the ON state, the data for lighting the game state notification LED, specifically, the game 01H is stored in the status notification LED output number.

  Thus, a series of control processes related to the big hit game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Small hit game control processing>
(9-6. Small hit processing: FIG. 25)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the small hit process (step S504 in FIG. 16) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit processing.

  In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the operation status of the special electric accessory is “in operation (02H)” (step S601).

  If the special electric accessory operation status is not “active (02H)” (step S601: ≠ 02H), the process proceeds to step S603. When the operation status of the special electric accessory is “in operation (02H)” (step S601: = 02H), after performing the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S602), the process proceeds to step S603. Note that the process for confirming the maximum prize winning number at the step S602 is the same as the process for confirming the maximum prize winning number at the special winning combination operation (step S551) in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  When the processing proceeds to step S603, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S603). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S607.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: YES), a small hit medium command transmission process is performed (step S604). In the small hit command transmission process, an effect control command based on the special electric accessory operation status is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Specifically, when the special electric accessory operation status is in the start process (00H), the “small hit start command” instructing the start of the OP effect is displayed. If the “small hit end command” instructing the start of the production is other than these, the process is terminated without transmitting anything. The “small hit end command” includes the current small hit type information and the game state information at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 side also determines the effect mode after the small hit game. Used. Therefore, this “small hit end command” also serves as a gaming state designation command. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode after the end of the small hit game based on the information included in the small hit end command, thereby matching the game state after the end of the small hit game and the effect mode related to the game state. You can take sex.

  When the small hitting medium command transmission process of step S604 is completed, a process for each special electric accessory operation status is performed (step S605). In the special electric accessory operation status-specific processing, processing according to the special electric accessory operation status is performed. Details of the special electric accessory operation status processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing according to the special electric accessory operation status in step S605 is completed, a small hit game state transition preparation process is performed (step S606). In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the small hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Based on the data set here, the gaming state after the small hit game is specified.

  When the hit game state transition preparation process in step S605 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory operation status is “in operation (02H)” (step S607).

  When the operation status of the special electric accessory is not “operating (02H)” (step S607: ≠ 02H), the small hit process is exited without doing anything.

  When the special electric accessory operation status is “operating (02H)” (step S607: = 02H), the already described large winning opening / closing operation setting table for small hits shown in FIG. 55 (b) is acquired (step S608). Then, a special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired (step S609).

  Next, solenoid setting processing is performed (step S610). This solenoid setting process is the same as the solenoid setting process and process of step S534 in the special prize opening / closing operation setting process (FIG. 19) in the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) (FIG. 18, step S524) of FIG. Since the manner is the same, detailed description is omitted to avoid duplicate description. In the solenoid setting process in step S610, the state of the special electric accessory actuating flag and the state of the special winning opening opening flag based on the small winning large winning opening opening / closing operation setting table (FIG. 55 (b)). It is specified.

  When the solenoid process in step S609 is completed as described above, the small hit process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(9-6-1 (a). Small hit start process: Step S612)
At the start of the small hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial status value “starting process (00H)”. Therefore, when a small hit is made, first, the small hit start process of step S612 is performed.

  In FIG. 26, the CPU 201 first performs a setting process necessary when starting a small hit game (step S612: small hit start process). Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the small hit, the “pre-operation interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation start processing (01H)” (special electric operation) As a result, 01H is stored in the accessory operation status). Thus, the small hit process is exited, and the process proceeds to step S607. The “pre-operation interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed and the jackpot has been determined (see step S 471 in FIG. 14 and step S 471 in FIG. 15A), the special variable winning device 52 is activated. , Which is a time interval that defines an interval in which an OP effect is performed. The pre-operation interval time is “1000 ms”, which is the same as the big hit start interval time for 2R short open latency big hit (see the “2R short open latency” column of the big hit start setting table in FIG. 52).

(9-6-1 (b). Small hit special electric accessory operation start processing: step S613)
Next, the small hit special electric accessory operation start process (step S613) will be described. This small hit special electric accessory operation start processing has entered the special electric accessory operation status-specific processing after the pre-operation interval time set in the processing of step S612 has elapsed (step S603 in FIG. 25: YES). (In this case, the operation status of the special electric accessory is “being activated (01H)” (see step S612)).

  In this small hit special electric accessory activation start processing, 00H is stored in the big prize winning prize counter (zero clear), and the “large winning opening operating time (2200 ms)” is stored in the special symbol accessory operating timer. The accessory operation status is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). It should be noted that the maximum winning number has been reached in the period until the special winning symbol operating timer reaches zero after the special winning opening operating time (2200 ms) elapses or in the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S602. Until the determination is made (step S602, step S603: NO, step S607: = operating (02H)), the processing of steps S608 to S610 is performed, and the small winning big prize opening / closing in FIG. 55 (b) is performed. Based on the operation setting table (OPENBL-D5), the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 50 is controlled.

(9-6-1 (c). Small hit special electric accessory in-operation processing: step S614)
Next, the small hit special electric accessory operating process (step S614) will be described. The small hit special electric accessory operating process is performed after the special winning opening operating time set in the process of step S613 has elapsed (step S603: FIG. 25: YES), and the special electric combination is performed. This is a case where the processing according to the object operation status is entered (in this case, the operation status of the special electric agent operation is “in operation (02H)” (see step S613)).

  In this small hit special electric accessory operating process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special winning opening release flag, the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory is stored. The operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

(9-6-1 (d). Small hit continuation determination process: Step S615)
Next, the small hit continuation determination process (step S615) will be described. This small hit continuation determination process is a case where the remaining ball discharge time set in the process of step S614 has elapsed (step S603: YES in FIG. 25) and the process by special electric accessory operation status is started ( In this case, the special electric accessory operation status is “continuing determination (03H)” (see step S614)).

  In this small hit continuation determination process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory activation flag, “small hit end interval time (5000 ms)” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation is performed. The status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). Here, the “small hit end interval time” is defined as an interval section in which an ED effect is performed until the small hit game ends after the winning prize 50 is closed and the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Refers to the time span. The small hit end interval time is “5000 ms”, which is the same as the big hit end interval time per 2R short-open latency probability (see the “2R short-open latency” column of the continuous operation device operation end interval setting table of FIG. 57). ).

(9-6-1 (e). Small hit end processing: Step S616)
Next, the small hit end process (step S616) will be described. This small hitting end process is a case where the small hitting end interval time set in the process of step S615 has elapsed (step S603: YES in FIG. 25) and the special electric accessory operation status specific process is started ( In this case, the special electric accessory operation status is “ending process (04H)” (see step S615)).

  In the small hitting end process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hitting flag as various setting processes at the end of the small hitting game, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “starting process (00H)” ( 00H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory.

  After finishing any one of the above steps S612 to S616, the process proceeds to the small hit game state transition preparation process of step S606 of FIG.

<9-6-2. Game state transition preparation process for small hits>
Next, the above-described small hit game state transition preparation process (step S606) will be described.

  In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process for specifying the game state after the small hit game is performed in order to specify the game state after the small hit game. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is acquired first, and then the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits (FIG. 60) is acquired. Then, with reference to the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits, the gaming state transition table “JTTBL-5” shown in FIG. 61 is based on the variation pattern allocation designation number and the small hit type (special symbol determination data). ~ "JTTBL-7" is acquired and the game state transition table is referred to and the corresponding data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and special symbol fluctuation counter). . Thereby, the gaming state after the small hit game is determined.

(T-19. Game state transition table selection table for small hits: FIG. 60)
FIG. 60 shows a game state transition table selection table for small hits. The game state transition table selection table for small hits according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of games associated with a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here, a small hit type). State transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” (see FIG. 61) are defined, and specifically, a plurality of types based on the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and special symbol determination data. Any game state transition table (game state transition table for small hits) is determined from among the game state transition tables.

(T-20. Game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 61)
With reference to FIG. 61, the small hit game state transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” will be described. These small hit gaming state transition tables include data for storing in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter as data for designating the gaming state to be transferred after the small hit game. It has been established. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is identified. Here, in “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7”, only the data to be stored in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number buffer and the special symbol fluctuation number counter buffer is determined. However, there is no transition of the internal gaming state, and only the transition of the gaming state as the variation pattern selection mode (change of the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) is performed. “JTTBL-5” is “normal B (playing state transition specified number of times 100)”, “JTTBL-6” is “normal C (playing state transition specified number of times 15)”, and “JTTBL-7” is “ This is a gaming state transition table for transitioning to normal C (the prescribed number of gaming state transitions 30 times).

  When the small hit process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Processing on production control unit side: FIGS. 27 to 37>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 37, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 27) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 29).

<10. Production control side main processing: FIG. 27>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main process (effect control side main process) on the effect control unit side. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 27 when the gaming machine body is powered on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S71 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed every predetermined time as the process during normal operation. Otherwise, the effect soft random number update process in step S080 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 29) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. Among the effect control commands, the hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decoration symbol designation command, variation stop command, jackpot start command, round start command, round end command, V winning command, which have already been described. , Jackpot end command and so on.

  For example, when a variation pattern designation command and a decorative symbol designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer, in the command analysis process, based on information (variation pattern information and winning type information) included in these commands, One or more types of effect patterns are determined. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense.

  When the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the determined effect scenario, the “non-operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as a basic effect scenario. When the frame effect button 13 is operated while the button notice effect is being executed, the non-operation effect scenario needs to be replaced and changed to the “operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is operated. Such a process related to scenario change is performed in “scenario update process” in step S074 described below.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  In the scenario update process, the basic effect scenario determined in the received command analysis process (step S073) may be rewritten as necessary. As described above, when the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the basic effect scenario, it is necessary to change to an operation effect scenario different from the current non-operation notice effect scenario. Here, when it is confirmed that the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button notice effect, the operation effect scenario is changed (for example, the parts effect is rearranged), and the changed effect scenario data is set as the scenario setting. Reset to area.

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 29) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, control data of the movable object accessory motor 61 is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 29) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S080 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(11. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 28)
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(12. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 29)
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 29, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 27, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, a control signal is output to the movable body accessory motor 61 through the drive control unit based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077). To do. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<13. Receive command analysis processing: FIGS. 30 to 36>
(13-1. Overview of received command analysis processing: FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the process executed in the received command analysis process (step S073 in FIG. 27). First, the received command is analyzed (step S711), and according to the command type as the analysis result (step S712), if it is a “big hit start command”, the big hit start command receiving process is performed (step S713), and “round start” If it is “command”, round start command reception processing is performed (step S714). If it is “round end command”, round end command reception processing is performed (step S715). Command reception processing is performed (step S716). If a winning command is received, a winning command receiving process is performed (step S717). When a command other than this is received, other command reception processing is performed (step S718).

(T-21. Hit command determination table: FIG. 51)
FIG. 51 is a hit command determination table showing specific data examples of the jackpot start command, round start command, round end command, and jackpot end command. "Command_TBL1" to "command_TBL8" in (b) in the upper row are hit command determination tables for 7 symbols direct hit, special symbol A per 7 symbols, B other than 7 symbols, and scenarios BB1 to BB5 for special figure 1. “Command_TBL9” and “command_TBL10” in the lower row (b) are hit command determination tables for C per 7 symbols and D per other than 7 symbols in FIG. In these hit command determination tables, the data for the “round end command” is described only for the 3R, 7R, and 11R for scenario BB1 to scenario BB5, and the data for the other rounds. Not. The reason why the “round end command” data was not listed for the other rounds is not because there is no data. The round end command exists individually for each round game, and all of them are transmitted. However, the round end command is used as an effect switching trigger on the receiving side in the third round for scenario BB1 to scenario BB5. And 7R and 11R only (see FIGS. 44 to 48). For other rounds, all the transmitted data is ignored on the receiving side and is not used as a stage change trigger. The description is omitted and the table is simply simplified.

  The contents of the hit command determination table include the following points. For example, in command_TBL1 that hits 7 symbols directly, F901 [H] is transmitted as the “big hit start command” at the start of the big hit start interval, and F101 [H] is set as the “round start command” at the start of each round game from 1R to 16R. ] To F110 [H] are transmitted, and F911 [H] is transmitted as a “big hit end command” at the beginning of the big hit end interval. Although not specifically shown, a “round end command” is also transmitted at the end of each round game of the 1R to 16R. The same applies to the other command_TBL2 to command_TBL3, command_TBL9, and command_TBL10.

  Further, for example, in command_TBL4 of scenario BB1, F903 [H] is transmitted as a big hit start command, F131 [H] to F13E [H] are transmitted as round start commands of the 1R to 14R, and F941 [ H] is transmitted. Although not specifically shown, a round end command for each round game of the 1R to 14R is also transmitted. Of these, FIG. 51 shows that F133 [H], F337 [H], and F33B [H] are transmitted as the 3R, 7R, and 11R round end commands, respectively. The same applies to the other command_TBL5 to command_TBL6.

  In this way, for each round game, a round start command (big prize opening command) is transmitted at the start end, and a round end command is transmitted at the end. For this reason, both the round start command and the round end command can be used as a trigger for starting the ED effect. That is, it is possible to start the ED effect at any time point of the beginning (starting end) or the end (ending) of the round game. In addition, the reception side production control unit captures a round start command or a round end command only when it is necessary as a trigger for starting the ED production, that is, only when it is the start or end of a round game that starts the ED production. In the subsequent round game, both the round start command and the round end command are unnecessary, so these commands are ignored and processing that is not accepted from the beginning is performed. Therefore, the processing burden on the CPU is reduced as compared with the case where processing is performed by accepting all of the round start command and the round end command in order to start the ED effect.

(13-2. Big hit start command reception processing: FIG. 31)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the process when the jackpot start command transmitted in step S514 of the jackpot start process in FIG. 17 is received. This jackpot start command is an effect control command sent at the start of the jackpot game.

  In FIG. 31, when receiving the jackpot start command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the command and acquires the current jackpot type information as the contents (step S721). Next, the value of the extended resort counter is confirmed (step S722). The “renso counter” is a big hit (conditions) that can be counted as a big hit renso during the above-mentioned electric chew support, that is, during the probability change / short time state (during the specified number of STs) or short time state (low probability / open extended state). If the winning bonus is a bonus game and a non-probable bonus game is won again, and the jackpot is played consecutively, 1 is added in the following step S724, and then the gaming status is the normal gaming status (low probability, non-short time, non-open extended status) This counter is cleared when it returns to. Thereafter, the winning effect table selection table is selected with reference to the hitting effect table selection table (step S723).

  In the case of the first hit, in step S723, the hit effect table selection table shown in FIG. 63 is referred to, and the hit effect table corresponding to the big hit type is selected from the hit effect tables WINTBL-P0 to WINTBL-P7 shown in FIG. Is selected (step S723). In the present embodiment, one hit performance table corresponds to one big hit type, but a plurality of same type hit effect tables may be prepared for one big hit type. Then, a lottery using a random number for performance is performed, and one hitting performance table is selected.

  Next, 1 is added to the villa counter as means for adding the villa number, and the result after the addition is set as the number of villas (step S724). Thereafter, the hitting effect table information selected in the hitting effect table, that is, the effect scenario data of the hitting effect and the data on the number of consecutive games is stored (step S725), and the big hit start command receiving process is exited. As a result, an OP effect is generated with the start of the big hit game, and the number of consecutive resorts is displayed on the OP effect screen.

  As specific control, table number information of the hit effect table is stored from the hit effect table selection table, and each time each command is received, the effect data corresponding to each round determined in the hit effect table (Production scenario data) is set.

  Here, as the hitting effect table, a hitting effect table in which the number of consecutive resorts is divided into a plurality of types is prepared. In this example, the number of consecutive resorts is divided into three classes of “1 to 4 times”, “5 to 9 times”, and “10 times or more”, and hitting effect tables A to C are prepared for each class. And the order is set so that the background and the music are enhanced in the order of the hit performance tables A, B, and C. When the extended game counter is incremented by 1 in step S724 and the value of the addition result exceeds the threshold value (numerical value range) classified as described above, the rank of the hit effect table referred to in step S723 is one level. Up. For example, when the number of consecutive resorts reaches the fifth time, the selected hit performance table is promoted from class A to class B, so that the background and the music are changed to those with a higher feeling of elevation than in the case of class A.

  In the above step S723, one hit effect table corresponding to the class ranking of the number of consecutive resorts is selected from the hit effect tables A to C by the hit effect table selection table, and on the table, A hit performance table (effect scenario) corresponding to the big hit type is selected. Thereby, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, when the big hit is started, that is, during the OP effect or from the OP effect to the 1R long open round game, the number of consecutive resorts is displayed as an image. In addition, when the class order is improved, the background effect is switched to a background effect of another color, for example, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, or the music is changed to a high tempo, and the light effect or The sound production also changes from yellow to green, red, or blinking.

  In this example, the consecutive game counter is incremented by 1 in step S724 when the jackpot start command is received, and the number of consecutive games is displayed during the OP performance or during the 1R long open round game immediately after the OP performance. However, it is not always necessary to display the image of the number of consecutive times during the OP effect. During the OP effect, the number of consecutive resorts may not be displayed as an image, but the number of consecutive resorts may be displayed as an image during the subsequent 1R round game or 1R cycle game.

(13-3. Round start command reception processing: FIG. 32)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a round start command (big prize opening command) is received. This round start command is an effect control command transmitted in step S522 of the special electric accessory operation start process in FIG.

  First, it is confirmed that the ED effect flag is not set (step S730). This “ED effect flag” is a flag that is set (5AH) in step S734 only while the ED effect is being played. At the end of the hit effect scenario, the step in the scenario update process (FIG. 35) is performed. Cleared in S766. After confirming that the ED effect flag is not set (≠ 5AH), that is, not in the ED effect, a round start command is acquired and analyzed (step S731), and the round start command is used as an ED effect start trigger command. It is checked whether the command is an action command (step S732). If the received round start command is not an ED effect start trigger command, the process proceeds to step S735, and the received round start command is a command (hereinafter referred to as “appropriate effect start trigger command”) that instructs the start or update of the effect scenario. To check whether or not.

(13-3-1. When a corresponding production start opportunity command is received)
If the received round start command is the above-mentioned corresponding effect start trigger command (step S735: YES), the process proceeds to step S736, and the corresponding effect to start a new effect based on the hit performance table data in FIG. Set the production scenario. For example, in the case of B other than 7 symbols (FIG. 43), when a round start command is received at the start of the 1R round game according to the effect scenario, the corresponding effect start opportunity command of “big hit effect 1” is assumed. Understand and understand that this is a chance start command of chance production (probability GET chance production) that can acquire “probable GET production” when the round start command is received at the beginning of the 4R round game. When a round start command is received at the beginning of the round game, it is understood that it is a corresponding effect start trigger command of “big hit effect 3”, and each corresponding effect scenario is set. In other command reception processes, a V winning command is received during a probable GET chance effect. At this time, a probable GET effect scenario for notifying that a V winning has been set is set. Therefore, the scenario of the probability variation GET chance effect is replaced with the scenario of the probability variation GET effect.

  In the present embodiment, the time when the round start command is received as the “appropriate effect start trigger command” is as follows.

(I) In case of 7 symbol direct hit (16R full open): Start point of 1R, 4R, 5R, 7R (Abbreviated starting point of each round game of 1R, 4R, 5R, 7R, and so on) ).
(Ii) In the case of A (10R full open + 6R short open) per other than 7 symbols: Start of 1R, 4R, 5R, 7R.
(Iii) For B other than 7 symbols (10R full open + 2R short open): 1R, 4R, 5R start.
(Iv) Scenario BB1 (10R full open + 4R short open): 1R, 5R start.
(V) In the case of scenario BB2 (10R full open + 4R short open): Start of 1R, 4R, 9R.
(Vi) For scenario BB3 (10R full open + 4R short open): 1R, 4R, 9R start.
(Vii) For scenario BB4 (10R full open + 4R short open): Start of 1R, 4R, 9R.
(Viii) For scenario BB5 (10R full open + 4R short open): Start of 1R, 4R, 9R.
(Ix) In the case of C per 7 symbols (16R full open): Start of 1R, 4R, 5R, 7R.
(X) In the case of D (4R full open + 8R short open) per other than 7 symbols: Start of 1R, 4R, 5R.

  In addition to the above-described effect start processing, during execution of the hit effect effect scenario, every time a round start command is received, the round display content is increased by 1R and an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. However, when the ED effect is started, this round display is not performed. In the case of the present embodiment, the ED effect is started after the repetition of the long open round with substantial play, that is, after the start of the short open round game is started. This is because, for example, the game time is as short as 0.1 seconds at the maximum, and it is almost meaningless to display a round during such a short round game and during the period when the ED effect is being played. The round display is performed only during the long open round game or long open cycle game when it is a long open round where a player can get a ball, and the next long open round game is started. The number of rounds is increased by 1R.

  Further, in the winning command receiving process (step S717 in FIG. 30), in step S563 in FIG. 22, a large winning opening winning command transmitted every time a winning ball is generated is received. This large winning opening winning command includes information on a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball. In response to the winning prize winning command, the number of acquired balls is calculated by the acquired ball number counting process during the winning command receiving process. At that time, the liquid crystal display device 36 sequentially displays the number of prize balls that will be obtained in the current round game, and the prize that has been obtained in the round game is added to the number of balls obtained in the previous round game. A value in the middle of the cumulative addition of the number of balls and a value of the addition result are displayed as an image (dynamic display), and an integrated value of the acquired number of balls is displayed every round. The calculation formula for the number of winning balls used at that time is a method of simply adding the number of winning prize balls for one winning ball as a calculation formula for the number of winning balls for one round, Any one of the methods in which a value obtained by subtracting one winning ball from the number of payout winning balls per winning ball is used as a unit and this is integrated by the number of winning balls is used. In addition to the method of counting the number of sections to be counted, in addition to a method of capturing the time when a winning ball is generated in one round game and sequentially adding and displaying (dynamic display) the corresponding number of winning balls every time one winning ball is generated. A method may be used in which a break of one round game is counted as a time point for counting, and the number of acquired balls for one round game is cumulatively added and displayed statically (static display) each time one round is advanced.

  In any of the display methods, the numerical display of the number of acquired balls is not performed when the repetition of the long open round game ends, that is, when the ED effect is started. The ED performance is played during the short-opening round game repetition period, and each short-opening round game time is as short as, for example, 0.1 seconds at maximum, so that a winning ball is generated during this short-time round game. This is because the accumulated value of the number of acquired balls is rather decreased when the player continues to play during this period, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. However, when a winning ball is actually generated, the payout amount is added to the acquired number of balls without ignoring this and the next acquired number of balls is displayed more accurately.

(13-3-2. When an ED effect start opportunity command is received)
Thereafter, when a round start command having the content of the start trigger command of the ED effect is received (step S732: YES), the process proceeds to step S733, and the “ED effect” effect scenario is performed based on the hit performance table data in FIG. Is set (step S733). For example, in the case of B other than 7 symbols (FIG. 43), in accordance with the effect scenario, if a round start command is received at the beginning of the 11th round game, it is understood that it is an “ED effect” start trigger command, Set the ending production scenario. Next, the ED effect flag is set (step S734), and the round start command receiving process is exited. Accordingly, the corresponding “ED effect” is started. The ED effect flag is cleared in step S766 in the scenario update process (FIG. 35) at the end of the effect scenario after the ED effect has elapsed.

In the present embodiment, the time when the round start command is received as the “ED effect start trigger command” is as follows.
(B) In the case of 7 symbol direct hit (16R full open) in the lottery of Special Figure 1: Not applicable.
(B) In case of A (10R full open + 6R short open) except for 7 symbols: 11R start point (ES1 point in FIG. 42).
(C) In the case of B other than 7 symbols (10R full open + 2R short open): 11R start (ES1 point in FIG. 43).
(D) Scenario BB1 (10R full open + 4R short open): 11R start (ES1 point in FIG. 44).
(E) Scenario BB2 (10R full open + 4R short open): 12R start point (point ES1 in FIG. 45).
(F) Scenario BB3 (10R full open + 4R short open): Start point of 13R (ES1 point in FIG. 46).
(G) Scenario BB4 (10R full open + 4R short open): Start of 13R (ES1 point in FIG. 47).
(H) In scenario BB5 (10R full open + 4R short open), the start of 13R (point ES1 in FIG. 48).
(I) C per 7 symbols (16R full open): 16R start (ES3 point in FIG. 49).
(N) In the case of D (4R full open + 8R short open) other than 7 symbols: 9R start point (ES4 point in FIG. 50).

  In the scenario (BB) from (A) to (H) except for the above (b) 7 symbols, even if the open round game is repeated, a short open round game may be interposed in the middle. However, in either case, the ED effect is the beginning of the first short-opening round game for the series of short-opening round games following the last long-opening round game in which no long-opening round game occurs (see FIG. It starts from the ES1 point) (see FIGS. 42 to 48). The ED effect continues to be played during the series of short opening round games and during INT between rounds following each short opening round. When the INT between rounds following the last short open round game in the series of short open round games ends, the final jackpot end interval is entered. The ED effect is also played during the last jackpot end interval, and ends when the jackpot end interval ends. Therefore, the series of short-opening round games and the subsequent effects for the INT between rounds are covered by the same common ED effects as the effects for the jackpot end interval, and it is not necessary to prepare the corresponding effects in particular. In addition, since all round start commands sent to the effect control unit while this ED effect is being played are treated as invalidated, the control burden on the effect control unit is also reduced correspondingly.

  The content displayed as an image in the ED effect is mainly the “FUJI” logo display screen, which suggests whether the next special symbol variation display is in a probable state, a normal state, or a short-time state. For example, a specific character or background color appears. In addition, the number of rounds executed in the big hit this time and the final total value of the number of balls acquired in all rounds of the long open round game are displayed in the plane. In addition, when the jackpot is consecutive, the number of consecutive resorts and the total number of balls acquired by the consecutive resort are also displayed. This ends the display of the dynamically changing number of rounds and the number of acquired balls.

  By the way, the ED effect at C per 7 symbols above appears as an “immediate challenge effect” and starts from the beginning of the last 16R long open round game (3 points in FIG. 49). It continues to flow during the long open round game (up to 29.8 seconds: indicated as 29S in the figure) and during the following round INT (1.98 seconds). It is also passed during the subsequent jackpot end interval, and ends when the jackpot end interval ends.

  What is worrisome here is that the ED production has started from the long open round game. In other words, the frequency of entering a ball during a 16R long open round game is high, and when the maximum prize opening is reached without waiting for the arrival of the above 29.8 seconds, and the frequency of entering the ball is closed. There is a possibility that there will be a difference in the end time of the ending production between the time when the 29.8 seconds have passed and the big prize opening is closed because the maximum number of winning prizes is not reached. Between the main control unit and the production control unit is open control, and the production control unit simply follows the instruction (round start command) from the main control unit, and only plays the big hit ending determined at the start of the big hit If the big hit ending is of a certain time width, there is a concern that the above-mentioned difference between the long and short cannot be dealt with, that is, it will not end in time.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect that is shorter in duration than the entire period in which the ED effect should flow is prepared as an effect of one unit, and this is used repeatedly. That is, in the case of C per 7 symbols, the ending effect (hereinafter referred to as “ED unit effect”), which is one unit for continuously repeating the effect, is from 16R start end to jackpot end INT end. Shorter than the total period (end effect presentation grant period). For example, if the period for giving an ending effect is 40 seconds, an effect with a shorter time width (for example, a victory effect of 9 seconds) is prepared as the unit effect for ED, and the unit effect for ED for 9 seconds is ending. Over the full length of the production period (40 seconds), it will appear 4 times and the end will be extended for 4 seconds, or it will appear 5 times and the next special symbol variation pattern designation command will arrive in the middle of the 5th time Then, the ED production ends. In this way, even if there is a difference in the closing timing of the big winning opening 50, whether it is before or after 29.8 seconds, the unit effect for the big hit ending will always be played to the end. Therefore, compared with the case where the ED effect does not flow to the end and is cut off halfway, the unnaturalness in the effect is reduced.

(13-4. Round end command reception processing: FIG. 33)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a round end command is received. This round end command is an effect control command transmitted in step S554 of the special electric accessory operating process of FIG.

  First, after confirming that the ED effect flag is not established (step S740), a round end command is acquired (step S741), and it is checked whether or not the round end command is an ED effect start trigger command ( Step S742). If the received round end command is not an ED effect start trigger command, the process proceeds to step S745, and the received round end command is a command with a content for instructing start or update of the effect scenario (corresponding effect start trigger command). Check whether or not. When the received round start command is the above-mentioned corresponding effect start trigger command (step S745: YES), the process proceeds to step S746, and the corresponding effect that should newly start the effect based on the hit performance table data in FIG. Set the production scenario. For example, in the case of scenario BB1 (FIG. 44), when a round end command is received at the end of the 3R round game, the corresponding stage start trigger for the “V open round effect (a V winning effect can occur)” Understand that it is a command, and set the relevant production scenario.

  Thereafter, when a round end command having the content of the start trigger command of the ED effect is received, the determination in step S742 becomes YES. Proceeding to step S743, an effect scenario of “ED effect” is set based on the hit effect table data in FIG. Thereby, the “ED effect” is started. Then, the ED effect flag is set (step S744), and the round start command receiving process is exited. The ED effect flag is cleared in step S766 in the scenario update process (FIG. 35) at the end of the effect scenario after the ED effect has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, the point in time when the round end command is received as the corresponding effect start trigger command is as follows.

(I) In case of 7 symbol direct hit (16R full open): Not applicable.
(Ii) In the case of A (10R full open + 6R short open) per other than 7 symbols: Not applicable.
(Iii) In case of B other than 7 symbols (10R full open + 2R short open): Not applicable.
(Iv) For scenario BB1 (10R full open + 4R short open): 3R termination.
(V) Scenario BB2 (10R full open + 4R short open): 3R, 7R termination.
(Vi) For scenario BB3 (10R full open + 4R short open): 3R, 7R, 11R termination.
(Vii) For scenario BB4 (10R full open + 4R short open): 3R, 7R, 11R termination.
(Viii) For scenario BB5 (10R full open + 4R short open): 3R, 7R, 11R termination.
(Ix) For 7 symbols per C (16R full open): Not applicable.
(X) D other than 7 symbols D (4R full open + 8R short open): Not applicable.

  In the present embodiment, there is no case where the round end command is received as the ED effect start trigger command. However, as another embodiment, as shown in the following (b) to (h), a mode in which the round end command is acted as an ED effect start trigger command, that is, a mode in which the ED effect is started from the end of the round game. Good. The starting point of the ED effect in this case is shown as ES2 in FIGS.

(B) In the case of 7 symbol direct hit (16R full open) in the lottery of Special Figure 1: Not applicable.
(B) In case of A other than 7 symbols (10R full open + 6R short open): 10R termination (ES2 point in FIG. 42).
(C) In case of B other than 7 symbols (10R full open + 2R short open): 10R termination (ES2 point in FIG. 43).
(D) Scenario BB1 (10R full open + 4R short open): 10R termination (point ES2 in FIG. 44).
(E) Scenario BB2 (10R full open + 4R short open): End of 11R (ES2 point in FIG. 45).
(F) Scenario BB3 (10R full open + 4R short open): 12R end (point ES2 in FIG. 46).
(G) Scenario BB4 (10R full open + 4R short open): 12R end (point ES2 in FIG. 47).
(H) Scenario BB5 (10R full open + 4R short open): 12R termination (ES2 point in FIG. 48).
(I) C per 7 symbols (16R full open): Not applicable.
(Nu) D (4R full open + 8R short open) per other than 7 symbols: Not applicable.

(13-5. Big hit end command reception processing: FIG. 34)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a jackpot end command is received. This jackpot end command is an effect control command transmitted in step S580 of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process of FIG.

  First, after confirming that the ED effect flag is not established (step S750), a jackpot end command is acquired (step S741), and it is checked whether or not the jackpot end command is an ED effect start trigger command ( Step S752). If the received jackpot end command is not an ED effect start trigger command, the jackpot end command reception process is terminated without doing anything. That is, the jackpot end command that does not act as an ED effect start trigger command is ignored.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the command is a trigger for starting an ED effect (step S752: YES), the process proceeds to step S753, and an effect scenario of “ED effect” is set based on the hit effect table data in FIG. Thereby, the “ED effect” is started. Then, the ED effect flag is set (step S734), and the round start command receiving process is exited. The ED effect flag is cleared in step S766 in the scenario update process (FIG. 35) at the end of the effect scenario after the ED effect has elapsed.

  In the case of this embodiment, the jackpot end command is accepted as the ED effect start trigger command only after the 16R round game in the 7 symbol direct hit (FIG. 41), and the interval 1.98s after that accurately passes. This is only when the jackpot end command arrives at the time, and in the other jackpot cases of FIGS. 42 to 50, even if the jackpot end command arrives, all are not accepted and are treated as invalid.

<14. Scenario update processing: FIG. 35>
In FIG. 27, when the received command analysis process (step S073, FIG. 30) is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. By this effect scenario timer, a time schedule for managing what effect pattern appears in the effect means with what time width during the big hit game is managed.

  Referring to FIG. 35, in the scenario update process, it is first checked whether any scenario is being executed (step S760). If any production scenario data is set during the command reception process, it is determined that the scenario is being executed, and this process is exited without doing anything. If the scenario is not being executed, the production scenario timer is updated (step S761), and the parts production group in the current production scenario is updated corresponding to the resultant production scenario timer value (scenario production update process: Step S762). Next, the liquid crystal command transmitted in step S093 of the timer interrupt process on the effect control unit side and the sound data output in step S076 are set (steps S763 to S764).

  And it is judged whether the production | presentation scenario was complete | finished (step S765). While the production scenario has not ended yet, the scenario update process is immediately exited. When the effect scenario ends (step S765: YES), the ED effect scenario end process starts (step S766), and the ED effect flag is cleared here. Moreover, the process which sets production mode background display data here is also performed. Next, another scenario end process is performed (step S767).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the effect scenario is loop-reproduced (step S768). Here, the situation after the time of the big hit end interval (big hit end INT) elapses will be considered with and without a holding ball. On the other hand, if there is a holding ball after the jackpot end interval has elapsed, a change pattern designation command is always transmitted from the main control unit to the production control unit at the timing when the first holding ball is consumed. Therefore, the production control unit side forcibly ends the ED production. Thereby, for example, the screen of the “FUJI” logo displayed at the end of the ED effect is switched to the variable display screen.

  On the other hand, if there is no holding ball, no effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit after the jackpot end interval has elapsed. Therefore, in order for the production control unit to grasp the current situation, the production control unit itself, that is, during the scenario update process, monitors the ED production time passage and ends the ED production on the condition that a predetermined time has passed. Control to switch the background display of the screen (probability change effect mode or time reduction effect mode, background display according to the secret effect mode when the latent win is selected), a variation pattern designation command is sent from the main control unit side I will wait for you.

  In any case, as a determination in step S768, if a subsequent command (fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, a new effect for variation is forcibly set. It will be a decision to execute. If it is determined that this loop reproduction is to be performed (step S768: YES), the process proceeds to the production scenario loop setting process in step S769, and a setting process for reproducing the production scenario from the beginning for the loop reproduction is performed (step S769). In this way, every time the production scenario ends, it is checked whether or not a subsequent command (variation pattern designation command) has been received to determine whether or not to perform loop playback. If no subsequent command has been received, loop playback is performed. This production scenario loop setting process is repeated. In the meantime, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted. As a result, the determination in step S768 changes to determination that loop playback is not performed (step S768: NO). Therefore, the in-progress production scenario is terminated without newly performing the production scenario loop setting process. The scenario update process in FIG. 35 is completed as described above, and the process returns to step S074 in FIG.

<15. Specific example>
Next, a specific example of the hit effect will be described. Here, a case where the hit effect table “WINTBL-P2” of “scenario BB2” is selected as the hit effect (case 1) is taken as an example. This hitting effect table “WINTBL-P2” is selected from the hitting effect table of FIG. 64 in step S723 of FIG.

  In the round start command reception process of FIG. 32, the 1R round start command “F141 [H]” is received at the 1R start end of FIG. In step S732, the command does not match “F14C [H]” of the 12th round start command for starting the ED effect (see FIG. 51). Therefore, the determination in step S732 is NO (not an ED effect start trigger command), and the process proceeds to step S735.

(Challenging production 1st time → production of failure)
In step S735, it is checked whether or not the received round start command is a “corresponding effect start trigger command” for starting or updating the effect scenario. In this case 1, in step S735, the round start command “F141 [H]” received at the start end of the 1R is the effect of “first challenge production → failure” over 2.5 cycles defined in the production scenario. It is determined whether or not it coincides with the round start command “F141 [H]” that should be started. Since the round start command “F141 [H]” received at the start end of the 1R corresponds to this, the determination in step S735 is YES (this is a corresponding effect start trigger command). Proceeding to step S736, an effect scenario (part scenario) for the corresponding effect is set based on the hit effect table data (win effect effect scenario: WINTBL-P2) in FIG. In case 1, the production scenario of “first challenge production → failure” is set at the beginning of this 1R.

  This “Challenge Production 1st time → Failure” production continues to flow over the period from the beginning of the 1R to the end of the 3R. During this period, the 1R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), the subsequent round INT (2 seconds), the 2R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), the subsequent round INT (2 seconds), The 3R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds) will elapse. During this period, commands (round start command and round end command) are received at the 1R end, 2R start end and end, and 3R start end in FIG. 45, respectively, but these are all ignored.

  Specifically, during the “Challenge production first time → failure” production period, first, at the end of the first round of FIG. 45, the round end command “F341 [H]” (FIG. (Not described) is received. Next, after a 2-second round INT, the round start command “F142 [H]” is received by the round start command reception process of FIG. 32 at the start end of the 2R, and the round end command reception process of FIG. The round end command “F342 [H]” is received. Furthermore, after a 2-second round INT, the round start command “F143 [H]” is received by the round start command reception process of FIG. 32 at the start end of the 3R, and the round end command reception process of FIG. 33 is received at the rear end. A round end command “F343 [H]” is received.

  Among these commands, round start commands “F142 [H]” to “F143 [H]” received at the start end of the 2R and the start end of the 3R by the round start command reception processing of FIG. Since it is neither a start trigger command nor a corresponding effect start trigger command, the determinations in steps S732 and S735 are NO, and the process returns without doing anything. That is, the round start commands “F142 [H]” to “F143 [H]” are ignored. In addition, round end commands “F341 [H]” to “F343 [H]” received at the end of the 1R, the end of the 2R, and the end of the 3R by the round end command reception processing of FIG. Since neither the ED effect start trigger command nor the corresponding effect start trigger command is determined, the determinations in steps S732 and S735 are NO, and the process returns without doing anything. That is, the round end commands “F341 [H]” to “F343 [H]” are also ignored.

(Failure → About the second production)
Subsequently, at the end of the 3R in FIG. 45, the round end command “F343 [H]” is received by the round end command receiving process of FIG. In step S745, the round end command “F343 [H]” is a round end command “F343 [H]” to start the “failure → second” production over 1.5 cycles determined in the production scenario. It is determined whether or not they match. Since they match, the determination in step S745 is YES (is the relevant effect start trigger command), the process proceeds to step S746, and the effect scenario for the effect of “failure → to the second” is made based on the hitting effect table data in FIG. Is set. As a result, the effect of “first challenge → failure” is changed to “failure → second”.

  The effect of “failure → to the second” is continuously played over a period of 1.5 cycle games from the end of the 3R round game to the end of the 4R cycle game (start of the 5R). During this 1.5-cycle game, the round INT after the 3R round game (2 seconds), the 3R round game (maximum 0.1 seconds), and the subsequent round INT (3 seconds) The period consisting of will elapse. As described above, regarding the production of “failure → to the second time”, the period (5. 3 seconds) of the 4R round game period (maximum 0.1 second) and the inter-round INT (2 seconds and 3 seconds) before and after that. 1 second) is secured as a period for production development. For the 4R round game period, the opening time of the grand prize opening 50 is as short as 0.1 seconds at the maximum, and the production of “failure → second time” is developed only with the time width of 0.1 seconds. This is because it was considered insufficient. Therefore, it is not always necessary to add both the preceding and following interval sections as long as the time length necessary to develop this performance is secured. It can also be a length. In this embodiment, the INT between rounds following the rear end of the 4R is set to 3 seconds, which is longer than the other 2 seconds, but this is one of the nodes that roughly classify the production scenario. This is to clarify this, and it can be set to the same 2 seconds as the others.

  During the period in which the production of “failure → second time” is flowing, the round start command “F144 [H]” is received by the round start command reception process in FIG. At the end of the fourth R, the round end command “F344 [H]” (not shown in FIG. 51) is received by the round end command receiving process of FIG. 33, but these commands are ignored.

(Challenge production for the second time → success production)
Subsequently, at the beginning of the 5R in FIG. 45, the round start command receiving process in FIG. 32 receives the round start command “F145 [H]”. The process proceeds from step S732 to step S735, and the received round start command “F145 [H]” is a round start command to start the “Challenge production second time → success” production over 2.5 cycles defined in the production scenario. It is determined whether or not it matches “F145 [H]”. Since they match, the determination in step S735 is YES (is the relevant effect start trigger command), the process proceeds to step S736, and the effect for the effect of “Challenge effect second time → success” is made based on the hitting effect table data in FIG. Set the scenario. As a result, the production of “failure → second time” is switched to the “challenge production second time → success” production.

  This “Challenge effect second time → success” effect is played over a period (2.5 cycle game period) from the beginning of the 5R to the end of the 7R. During this period, the 5R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), the subsequent round INT (2 seconds), the 6R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), the subsequent round INT (2 seconds), The period of the 7R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds) will elapse. During the performance of the second challenge production → success, the round start command reception process of FIG. 32 or the round end command of FIG. 33 respectively at the 5R end, 6R start end and end, and 7R start end in FIG. The reception process receives a round start command or a round end command, but these are all ignored.

(About V opening round production)
Subsequently, at the end of the seventh round in FIG. 45, the round end command reception process in FIG. 33 receives the round end command “F347 [H]”. In step S745 in FIG. 33, it is determined whether or not this round end command “F347 [H]” matches the round end command “F347 [H]” to start the “V opening round effect” defined in the effect scenario. Is done. Since they coincide with each other, the determination in step S745 is YES (it is a corresponding effect start opportunity command), the process proceeds to step S746, and the effect scenario of “effect for V-opening round” is set based on the hitting effect table data in FIG. The Thereby, the production is switched from “Challenge production second time → success production” to “V opening round production”. This V opening round effect is played over a period (1.5 cycle game period) from the end of the 7R to the start of the 9R. During this time, a V winning command is transmitted, and when receiving this, a V winning effect appears.

  During the period in which the V-opening round effect is developed, INT between rounds after the 7R round game (2 seconds), 8R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), and subsequent round INT (3 Seconds) will elapse. In this way, for the “V opening round effect”, the round game period (maximum 29.8 seconds) of the 8R and the period between the previous and subsequent rounds INT (2 seconds and 3 seconds) (1. The 5th cycle game period) is set as the stage for stage development, as in the case of the stage of “failure → second time” in the 4R cycle game, it works as a V open round (special round). This is to ensure sufficient time for the “open round production”. Also, it is clarified that the INT between the rounds following the rear end of the 8R is 3 seconds, and that it is longer than the other 2 seconds is one of the milestones that are roughly classified in the production scenario. It is also for the purpose. In view of this function, it is sufficient that the player recognizes it as one milestone that roughly divides the entire hit effect scenario, and the player may not actually recognize as such. Therefore, the INT between rounds following the rear end of the 8R can be freely set to the same 2 seconds as the others.

  A player must challenge a V-winning game that appears as an image on the screen or does not appear as an image during the above-mentioned “V-opening round effect” and usually makes a right-handed game. The ball enters the continuous winning opening located in the big winning opening 50, the V winning is confirmed, and a V winning effect for informing that is generated.

  During the “V-opening round effect” period from the 7R end to the 9R start, where the V-winning game is played, at the 8R start in FIG. 45, a round start command reception process in FIG. 32 starts the round. The command “F148 [H]” is received, and at the rear end of the 8R, the round end command “F348 [H]” (omitted in FIG. 51) is received by the round end command receiving process of FIG. These commands are ignored.

(About jackpot production 2)
Subsequently, at the starting end of the 9th R in FIG. 45, the round start command receiving process in FIG. 32 receives the round start command “F149 [H]”. Proceeding from step S732 to step S735, the received round start command “F149 [H]” matches the round start command “F149 [H]” that should start the production of “big hit production 2” defined in the production scenario. Determine whether. Since the two match, the determination in step S735 is YES (is the corresponding effect start trigger command), the process proceeds to step S736, and the effect scenario for the effect of “big hit effect 2” is set based on the hit effect table data in FIG. To do. As a result, the production is switched from “V opening round production or V prize production production” to “Big hit production 2”.

  This “big hit effect 2” effect is continuously played over a period (three-cycle game period) from the start end of the 9R to the start end of the 12R. Therefore, during that time, the 9R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), the subsequent round INT (2 seconds), the 10R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), and the subsequent round INT (2 seconds) , 11R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), and subsequent INT (2 seconds) period between rounds. During the period of “big hit effect 2”, a round start command or a round end command is received at the 9R end, 10R start end and end, and 11R start end and end in FIG. 45, respectively. All ignored.

(Ending production)
45, the round start command reception process in FIG. 32 receives the round start command “F14C [H]”. Proceeding to step S732, it is determined whether or not the received round start command “F14C [H]” matches the round start command “F14C [H]” for starting the “ED effect” defined in the effect scenario. Since they match, the determination in step S732 is YES (it is an ED effect start trigger command), the process proceeds to step S733, and an effect scenario of “ED effect” is set based on the hit effect table data in FIG. Then, an ED effect flag is set (step S734). As a result, the “big hit effect 2” is switched to the “ED effect” effect.

  This “ED effect” effect continues to flow over the period from the beginning of the 12th R to the beginning of the jackpot end INT (short-open three-cycle game period) and the jackpot end INT period. Therefore, in the meantime, the 12R round game (maximum 0.1 seconds), the subsequent round INT (3 seconds), the 13R round game (maximum 0.08 seconds), and the subsequent round INT (2 seconds) 14R round game (maximum 29.8 seconds), and subsequent INT (1.98 seconds) between rounds. The reason why the inter-round INT following the rear end of the 12R is 3 seconds is not to make the V open round (special round), but to clarify that it is one of the milestones that roughly classify the production scenario. It can be set to 2 seconds, the same as the others. The maximum round game period of the 12th round is 0.08 seconds, which is shorter than the other 0.1 seconds, but can be adjusted to the same 0.1 seconds as the others.

  During this “ED effect” period, a round end command “F34C [H]” (not shown in FIG. 51) is received at the end of the 12th R in FIG. 45, but is ignored. At the start and end of the 13th R, a round start command “F14D [H]” and a round end command “F34E [H]” (not shown in FIG. 51) are received but ignored. At the start and end of the 14th R, the round start command “F14E [H]” and the round end command “F34E [H]” are received but ignored. Thereafter, the jackpot end command “F951 [H]” is received at the beginning of the jackpot end INT, but this is also ignored.

  In this way, it is very characteristic that “ED production” is already started from the stage of round 12R game before the big hit end INT, that is, from the stage where the repetition of the long open round in which the ball is obtained is completed. Is. As soon as the repetition of the short opening round in which the ball is virtually unobtainable starts (from the beginning of the 12R), the ED effect is started, and this ED effect is developed over the entire period until the end of the jackpot end INT. Therefore, the player is clearly informed that the round game with the game is substantially completed from the time when the short open round starts. Therefore, a ball-type game machine that can easily grasp the game state is provided.

  In addition, the fact that only one ED effect is developed from the beginning of the 12R, it is not necessary to prepare individual round effects for the 12R, 13R and 14R round games and the subsequent INT between rounds. That is, it means that a ball game machine that does not require a connection effect up to an ending effect is provided for a period in which a short-open round game is repeated. In addition, a round start command and a round end command are received at the 12R end, the 13R start and end, and the 14R start and end in FIG. 45, but these commands are not accepted and ignored. Therefore, the CPU does not need to perform useless control processing, and the control burden on the CPU can be reduced accordingly.

  In addition, since there is no division between rounds when viewed from the overall hit stage production, the player is not aware of the division of each round game, and follows the continuous production scenario, that is, the success or failure of the challenge production and the V prize. It is possible to enjoy the battle production while paying attention only to the production change such as the presence or absence and the transition of the production result. In scenarios BB1 to BB5, the final round of the long release operation is changed to 10R for scenario BB1, 11R for scenario BB2, 12R for scenario BB3 and scenario BB4, and 11R for scenario BB5. The reason for this is to give the player the pleasure of guessing in the middle round where the final round of the long release action will be. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the ball game while reducing the control load.

<Other command reception processing contents: FIGS. 36 to 37>
FIG. 36 to FIG. 37 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in step S718 (other command reception processing) in FIG. Hereinafter, a case where the “variation pattern designation command”, “big hit end command”, “small hit end command”, and “decorative symbol designation command” are received will be described.

(16. Reception process of variation pattern designation command: FIG. 36)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S450 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 36, when the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, the content of the command is first analyzed (step S831), and the variation pattern information of the special symbol as the content is obtained, and the RAM 243 is obtained. (Step S832). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game (decoration symbol variation display game) is determined based on the variation pattern information stored here and information (special symbol determination data information) included in the ornament symbol designation command. It has become.

(17. Decoration symbol designation command reception processing: FIG. 37)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a decorative symbol designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. Here, based on the variation pattern information obtained by the variation pattern designation command reception process of FIG. 36 and the information obtained by the decoration symbol designation command, effects (various notice effects) and decoration symbols in the symbol variation display game are displayed. Display modes (temporary stop symbols, reach symbols, stop decoration symbols, etc.) are determined, and an effect scenario relating to the current variable display game is configured.

  In FIG. 37, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the decorative symbol designation command and acquires the contents (step S871).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S872). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol (decoration) to be finally stopped based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command The symbol stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, if the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern designated for reach production and the winning type information is a probability variable big hit with a 16R long release condition, a decorative pattern stop display mode related to the probability variable big hit with a 16R long release condition is displayed. In order to determine, the left symbol is first determined by lottery, and then the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can be reached are determined as the right symbol (reach symbol determination), and the left symbol and right symbol that are determined Based on the above, the middle symbol is determined so that the decorative symbol sequence (big hit symbol) related to the 16R long open condition probability variation big hit is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative symbol data is stored and used in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, a prefetch notice effect process is performed (step S873). In the pre-reading notice effect process, an effect process is performed for causing a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” in the current symbol variation display game to appear. Here, lightning effect production data is generated by displaying a dedicated notice image (lightning image imitating lightning bolt) as a pre-reading notice effect of “change start time change system”, and this is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Thereby, the lightning effect by the lightning image display appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (see FIG. 6B). It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect of the “change system at the time of winning” that appears when the operation holding ball occurs is the “change system at the time of winning” when the hold addition command (the command transmitted in step S321 in FIG. 10) is received. An effect process for changing the display of the reserved color is performed as the pre-reading notice effect (see FIGS. 5 and 6).

  Next, an effect process corresponding to the effect mode is performed (step S875: effect mode branching process). In the effect mode branch process in step S875, the effect scenario setting process (steps S876 to S880) corresponding to the current effect mode is called and executed. In these effect scenario setting processes, effect patterns (part effects) under each effect mode are determined. Based on the determined effect pattern, an effect scenario that appears in the current symbol variation display game is configured, and the data of the effect scenario is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  When the effect scenario setting process corresponding to the effect mode described above is completed, various setting processes required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game are performed (step S881). Here, various settings required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game, including a hold display shift process (hold display shift process) accompanying the digestion of the operation hold ball, are performed. In the hold display shift process, the hold display data storage area (hold 2 display data storage area, hold 3 display data storage area, hold 4 display data storage) corresponding to the hold display data n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The hold data stored in the area) is overwritten on the hold display data storage area corresponding to 'n-1', respectively, and an empty area is provided in the hold 4 display data storage area. Since the display scenario data for hold display is not stored in the hold display data storage area which is an empty area, in this case, the hold display effect is not performed and the corresponding display location is displayed as being turned off (see FIG. 5). Thereby, the CPU 241 refers to the on-hold display effect scenario stored in the on-hold display data storage area, and performs an effect display in which the position of the existing on-hold display unit is shifted by one to the old storage position as a whole. At the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the hold display expressing the state where the operation hold ball is digested is performed. Note that the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203 is also stored in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the hold n prefetch information storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) in the same manner as the above-described shift processing of the hold display data storage area. The prefetch determination result information is overwritten in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to 'n-1', an empty area is provided in the hold 4 prefetch information storage area, and the next hold addition command is received. An area for storing the result information is secured.

  When the process of step S881 is completed, the decorative symbol designation command receiving process is exited, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game according to the effect scenario is started.

(Modification 1)
As described above, the ED effect handled in this embodiment is a big hit only in the case of one of the big hits belonging to the first group that repeatedly executes the long open round game up to the specified number of rounds (7 symbols direct hit: FIG. 41). The ED effect corresponds to the end INT period, and after the other big hit type, that is, the long open round game is executed a plurality of times, the short open round game is repeatedly executed up to the specified number of rounds (7 symbols) ED effect starts at a point before the big hit end interval in the case of A per other than A, B per other than 7 symbols, Scenario BB1 to BB5, D per other than 7 symbols D) and C per 7 symbols belonging to the first group. And acts as the second jackpot.

  However, in the case of a big hit belonging to the second group, it is relatively free to determine when to start the ED effect from the hit game if the condition that the short open round game is repeated thereafter is satisfied. Can be determined. In other words, it is not bound by the rule that the ED effect is made to appear in correspondence with the conventional jackpot end INT period, and not only the start and end of the cycle game but also the end of the round game in the middle is “ED effect”. Can be treated as the starting point for streaming.

  For example, in the example of scenario BB2 in FIG. 45, as shown as “ES1” in FIG. 45, “ED effect” is flowed from the beginning of the first 12R cycle game in the cycle game of the short open round. However, as shown as “ES2” in FIG. 45, an “ED effect” can also be played from the end of the 11R round game, which is the long open round immediately before that. In this way, the form of playing the ED effect from the time point of “ES2” is a hit that belongs to the second group including the long open round game and the long and short open round game (the A in FIG. 42 except for the 7 symbols, the scenario in FIG. 44). BB1, scenario BB3 in FIG. 46, scenario BB4 in FIG. 47, scenario BB5 in FIG. 48, D other than 7 symbols, etc.) can be adopted.

  In addition, in the case of C per 7 symbols of FIG. 49 consisting of only the long open round (at the time of consecutive villas), as shown as “ES3”, the contents such as “immediate attack challenge production” from the beginning of the 16th R of the long open round "ED production" can be played. However, when the long open round and the short open round are mixed (for example, in the case of D other than the 7 symbols in FIG. 50), the “ED effect” starts from the start end of the long open round (for example, the start end of the 4R round game). Can also be played.

  In addition, as shown as “ES4” in the case of D other than 7 symbols in FIG. 50, in the middle of a short open round of a group of 5R to 12R, that is, in the middle of a short open cycle game (in FIG. 50, the 9R cycle) “ED production” can also be played from the beginning of the game.

(Modification 2)
In the case of the above embodiment, the interval time between rounds after the last round game is a fixed value determined only by the “residual ball discharge time (here, 1.98 seconds)” set in step S555 of FIG. The “interval before opening” set in the pre-opening interval setting table in FIG. 56 has been described as not being added. However, even if the remaining ball discharge time is considered variable, the remaining ball discharge time may be reset to 2 seconds longer than 1.98 seconds in step S555 (various setting processing at the end of the round game) in FIG. Good. Also, by adding the pre-release interval 20 ms to the remaining ball discharge time (1.98 seconds) using the pre-release interval setting table of FIG. 56, a 2-second round interval longer than the remaining ball discharge time after the final 16R game. You can also take time. Also, by using the interval setting table before opening shown in FIG. 56, the interval before opening (1.02 seconds) is added to the remaining ball discharge time (1.98 seconds), thereby setting the interval time between rounds of 3 seconds after the round game. Instead, the “remaining ball discharge time” set in step S555 of FIG. 21 can be set to 3 seconds.

(Modification 3)
In the case of the above embodiment, as the type of jackpot, it is a hit that is not obvious that it will be in a probabilistic state at first (a hit that will become a non-probable change state without winning a V prize). The jackpot type (conditional probability variation jackpot) of the type that the transition to the probability variation state is confirmed after the big hit when the condition of “winning V in the game” is satisfied has been described. In other words, in the above embodiment, when winning one of the big hit types by the big hit lottery and winning V in the V open round during the win game, it is determined that the probability big win is established, and the positive change state after the win game. In addition, when the V winning is not won, the non-probable big hit is confirmed, and after that hit game, the low probability state (the short state with the extended opening function or the normal state without the extended opening function) is transferred. explained. However, as a big hit type, a big hit type that is not conditional (a big hit to be transferred to a gaming state with at least a high probability state (for example, a latent state or a probable state) regardless of the occurrence of a V-winning). Original probabilistic big hit)) or unconditional non-probable big hit (regardless of occurrence of V winning, big hit (original non-probable big hit) to shift to a gaming state (for example, short-time state or normal state) with at least a low probability state )) May include one or a plurality of types, or may be a mode in which only one or a plurality of unconditional jackpot types are provided. In the case of the type, a V prize and an effect of notifying this (probable GET effect or V prize effect) are generated. Unlike the above-described embodiment, since it is not a mode in which the transition to the probability variation state is determined depending on whether or not a V winning has occurred, a ball game machine without a V winning opening Can be applied.

<Preferred embodiment>
A preferred embodiment of the present invention is as follows.

(1) A main control unit (20) that mainly controls the overall game operation, display means (liquid crystal display device 36) for producing an effect accompanying the game, and an effect that controls effect control in the display means A ball game machine comprising a control unit (24) and configured to be able to execute a display effect or a sound effect in the display means;
The main control unit
A jackpot game lottery means for lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a big hit game that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state when a game ball enters the starting port (S409 in FIG. 12) When,
On condition that the jackpot lottery is won, the operation of opening and closing the grand prize winning opening (50) in a predetermined pattern is set as one round game, and the round game is repeatedly executed up to a predetermined number of rounds, Jackpot game control means (S501 to S509) for executing and controlling the jackpot game;
A round start command for notifying that the big prize opening has been opened by the jackpot game control means, a round end command for notifying that the big prize opening has been closed, and a big hit for notifying that all round games have ended. A transmission means (S522, S554, S580) for creating an end command and transmitting it to the effect control unit,
The jackpot is a jackpot belonging to the first group (7 symbols) that repeats a long open round game in which the game winning ball is opened and then closed until the specified number of rounds is repeated as the round game so that the game ball can be easily won. Direct hit: FIG. 41, C per symbol: C: FIG. 49) After the long open round game is executed a plurality of times as the round game, after the big winning opening is opened short so that the game ball is difficult to win. A jackpot belonging to the second group that repeatedly executes the short-opening round game to be closed up to the prescribed number of rounds (A except 7 symbols, B per 7 symbols, Scenario BB1 to BB5, D per 7 symbols),
The transmission means transmits the round start command when the round game is started in the jackpot game, in any case of the jackpot belonging to the first group and the jackpot belonging to the second group, and the round game Is configured to transmit the round end command when the game ends, and to transmit the jackpot end command when the specified number of round games have ended (S522, S554, S580),
The production control unit
First effect control means for starting an ending effect based on the jackpot end command for at least one of the jackpots belonging to the first group (7 symbol direct hit: FIG. 41);
The last long-opening round game has been completed for at least one of the big hits belonging to the second group (A per 7 non-symbols, B per 7 non-symbols, Scenarios BB1 to BB5, D per 7 non-symbols) Based on the round end command transmitted at the time (ES2 time) or based on the round start command transmitted when the first short open round game in the repetition of the short open round game starts (ES1 time) And a second effect control means for starting the ending effect,
Even if the second effect control means receives the round start command, the round end command, and the jackpot end command during the execution of the ending effect, the second effect control means uses these as triggers for triggering (the opening effect and the ending effect based thereon) )
A ball game machine characterized by that.

(2) The main control unit
As the jackpot game lottery means, a lottery lottery means (S409 in FIG. 12) for performing a lottery for lottery based on establishment of start conditions and a lottery type based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery means are classified into a plurality of types. Type lottery means for lottery from type information (S409 in FIG. 12),
Game state transition control means (S431 to S434, FIGS. 58 to 59A, FIG. 59B) for controlling the transition of the gaming state after the big hit to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the type lottered by the type lottery means; Have
The jackpot includes jackpots that can be counted for jackpot renso (conditional probability variation jackpots (or probability variation jackpots) / non-probable variation jackpots) and jackpots that are not counted for jackpot renso (latent probability variation jackpots). ,
The production control unit
Among the gaming states, during the predetermined gaming state other than the normal gaming state (during the time when the open extension function is activated, during the time-shortening state or during the time-shortening state), the big hit lottery means can be counted by the lottery lottery means. There are consecutive resort number addition means (S724 in FIG. 31: consecutive resort counter) for adding the number of consecutive resorts on the condition that the jackpot is won,
When the jackpot game is started (the opening effect screen, or the effect screen for the opening effect to the 1R round game, or the 1R round game) On the effect screen) or displayed on the display means as part of the ending effect (steps S724 to S725 in FIG. 31),
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that.

(3) The transmission means includes:
Means for transmitting a winning prize winning command including predetermined winning ball information per winning ball when a gaming ball wins the winning prize during the big winning game (step S563);
The production control unit
Each time the command for winning a prize is received, the number of obtained balls is counted by accumulatively adding the number of balls of a prescribed numerical value as an addition unit (winning command receiving process (step S717 in FIG. 30)). Counting the number of acquired balls)
The acquired number-of-balls calculation means displays the number of acquired balls that are sequentially counted or counted during the round game on the display means (dynamic display or static display), and during the next round game, By accumulating the number of acquired balls that are sequentially counted or counted in the round game on the acquired number of balls, and displaying the addition result on the display means (dynamic display or static display), An acquired ball number notification control means (production control unit 24) for performing notification control on the display means to notify the number of acquired balls acquired during the big hit game,
The acquired number-of-balls notification control means notifies the acquired number of balls through notification control on the display means during the period in which the long open round game is repeated, and after the short open round game is started to repeat Do not report the number of acquired balls,
The bullet ball game machine according to (1) or (2) above, wherein

  The present invention is useful for a game machine using a game ball or a game medium corresponding thereto.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
38c LED display for holding complex display,
39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
50 grand prize awards,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 Speaker,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
61 Movable body accessory motor,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

Performs much per drawing triggered by ball entrance of game ball into the starter hole, controls a main control unit for transmitting a command based on the lottery result, the effect on the basis of the command transmitted from the main control unit directing A ball game machine comprising a control unit,
The main control unit
Wherein on condition that it has won the large per lottery, and the operation for opening and closing the big winning opening in a predetermined pattern with a single round game repeatedly executed until the specified number of rounds which defines the round game in advance, jackpot thereafter Jackpot game control means for generating a jackpot game for executing an end interval ;
A round start command for notifying that the big prize opening has been opened by the jackpot game control means, a round end command for notifying that the big prize opening has been closed, and a big hit for notifying that all round games have ended. Transmission means for transmitting an end command,
The jackpot game is a short-opening round game in which the jackpot game is a round game, after a long- opening round game is executed a plurality of times, and then the big winning opening is short-opened so that the game ball is difficult to win. It is a big hit that will be repeated until the specified number of rounds,
The transmission means transmits the round start command when the round game is started in the jackpot game, transmits the round end command when the round game is ended, and the round game of the specified number of rounds is performed. Configured to send the jackpot end command when finished,
The production control unit
In the jackpot game, during the period in which the long open round game is executed a plurality of times, a predetermined effect of the big hit effect with the round start command or the round end command as an effect start trigger is executed, and the short open round when the first short open round game of repetitions of the game is started, ends the predetermined effect, a presentation control means for starting the ending effect to run contain in exchange Warini the jackpot completion interval Have
Before Ki演 out control means, the round start command during the execution of the ending effect, the round end command, even when receiving the jackpot termination command to continue the ending effect,
A ball game machine characterized by that.

Images